ARABIC GRAMMAR

PARSDIG3IS. LITTERATURE, CHRESTORIdTHI'

ASD

t T ~
EP

W
CARLSRU.HE AXD L E I P S L C
H. R E U T H E B
LONDON NEW YORK PARIS .
d&IJANS a NOZGATE B. WESTERMANN b C o a . NAIBONIIEIIVE b 01..
14 BENRIEPTASTBEET 898, BROADWAY. 26, QUAI YOZTAIRE.
COVENT QABDaK.
 GRAMMAR.
I . LETTERS AXD SOUNDS (5 1-10) .
Page
S I . Consonants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
5 2. Long Vowels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Short Von.els. Nunation. G6zma. . . . . . . . . .
5 4. Hamza . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 . Teshdid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S B . Vasla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i.3Iedda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
9 The Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S 10. Numerals and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . .

S .
11 Pronomina personalia . . .............. 18
S 12. Pronomina demonstrativa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
S .
13 Pronomina relativa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
8 14. Pronomina interrogativa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

15. The root form . . . . . . . . . . ......... 23

8 1 6. General view of the derived stems . . . . . . . . . 24
. .
17 I Stem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
18.11. Stem . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 25
XI1 COSTESTS.
Page
S . .
19 I11 Srem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2 I .
e m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
. .
9 21 V Stem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
. .
5 2 2 TT1 Stem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
. .
5 23 TLI Stem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
. .
$ 2 1 TJII Steni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 28
. .
5 25 .
and X1 Stem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
.
S 26 . S Stem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
S 27 The ciuadriliteral Terb . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . 29
S %. The P a s s i ~ e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
S .
29 Tenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
9 3Cs . 3Ioods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
$ 31 . Imperatice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
.
S 32 The Persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
.
S 33 Participles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
.
5 34 1nfmiti.i-e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
.
35 Verba mediie geminats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
S 36 . 'Derba hamzata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
S 37 . T e a k Verbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
S 3 s . Terba primie g and 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3S
.
5 39 'Derba mediz g and 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
S . Verba tertia? g and 6 . .
40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5 .
41 Doubly meal; Verbs
,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
42 . The Terb , g. . . . . ............. 46
S 43. Verbs of praise and blame . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5 4 1. Forms of admiration . . . ............. 46
5 .
45 The Verb with Pronominal suffixes . . . . . . . . . 47
S .
46 Sign of the Accusative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4i

S 47 . Derived Nouns. Intensive foims . . . . . . . . . . . 48

5 .
48 Nomina loci. instrumenti. speciei . . . . . . . . . . 50
5 .
49 Xomina relativa and deminutiva . .......... 51
 CONTEXTS .
. .
b GENDEROF XOCSS
Page
.
50 31ascdine and feminine Gender ........... 52
S 51. Formation of the Feminine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

52. Kurnber and Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

5 53. Formation of the Dual and Plural . . . . . . . . . . 54
S 54. Somina tliptota and diptota . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
5 55. Somina diptota . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
S 56. Inflection of the cleternlinate Kouns . . . . . . . . 57
5 57. hbbreviatioll of Dual and Plural Nouns . . . . . . . 58
5 56. Xoun with Pronominal sufikes . . . . . . . . . .
59
S 59. Vocalic additions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
60. Proper names connected vith C+\ . . . . . . . . . 60
5 61. Vocative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5 62 . Broken Plurals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
S 63 . List of the chief forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5 64 . Broken Plurals of Nouns mith more than three radicals 65
65 . Ii-re,d .ar Nouns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

5 .
66 Cardinals ..................... 69
8 . ...
67 Connection of Numbers with the thing numbered 71
.
68 Ordinal numbers and fractions ........... 72

o ~ a.p Particles (8 69-71) .

.
69 Adverbs. Prepositions. Conjunctions ......... 73
8 .
70 Inseparable Particles ................ 73
5 .
i 1 Prepositions and Conjunctions with Suffixes ..... 74

. .L Tenses.
CJLU~
.
72 Perfect and Imperfect ............... 76
S .
73 Usage of the Perfect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
. .
 Page
71. Usage of the Impedecs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
9 75. Subjunctive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
76. Jussive . . . . . . . ............... 79
S 77. Participle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

5 .
78 Accusative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S1
5 i 9 . Object. double Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
S0 . Absolute Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S2
5 . 81 Accusatire as Predicate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5 . 82 Accusative of nearer definition . . . . . . . . . . . 83

.
S3 Syntactical additions to the Xoun . . . . . . . . . . 84
9 84. Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5 35. Apposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5 86. Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S6 '
5 87. Genitive Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S6
5 .
88 Special E n d s of Genitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8i
5 .
S9 The Genitire inseparable . . . . . . . . . . ' . . . . S9

Clzap. I K 17ze siwzple sentence .

5 90. Distinction of Xominal and Verbal sentences . . . . . 89
.
91 The Verb in a Verbal sentence . . . . . . . . . . . 90
S 92. The Predicate in a Nominal seutence . . . . . . . . 91
5 .
93 Connection between Subject and Predicate . . . . . . 98
5 96. Peculiarities of the same . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
95. The Particles 'inna and ' a m a . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5 .
96 Dependent sentences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
5 97. Aspdeton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5 .
9S Exceptive Particle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Chap. 7. Comyound sentences .

5 99. Relative sentences . . . . . . . . . . ....... 96
5 .
100 Sentences denoting a state or condition ....... 99
 Page
lul . Temporal se~ltences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
.
3 102 Conditional sentences with the Perfect . . . . . . 100
103. Conditional sentences vith the Jussive . . . . . . . 100
5 l u 4. The Particle fa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Strong triliteral Berb Act . I. . . . . . . . . . .

Strong triliteral Terb Pass . I. . . . . . . . . . .
Qnadriliteral Verb, dei-ived Stems . . . . . . . . .
Stroag triliteral Verb. derived Stellls . . . . . . .
i7erbum nledis geininats Act . I . . . . . . . . .
Verbum mediz geminatse Pass . I . . . . . . . .
Verbum meclize geminat=. derived Stems . . . . .
Terbum prima radicalis 9 and 3 . . . . . . . .
.
T-erbum medis rarlicalis g S c t I . . . . . . . .
.
Verbum llledis radicalis 3 -4ct I . . . . . . . .
Terb~unlmedis radicalis g or 3 Pass I . . . . . .
Terbum mediz radicalis g and 3. derived Stel~ls .
Verbum tertize radicalis g (G) Act . I . . . . .
Perbum tertize radicalis 6 (G)
.I . . . . Act
Verb- 3
tel-tie radicalis g or (S)
Act . I . .
Verbum tei-tis radicalis g or 6 Pass . I .....
Verbum tertize radicalis g or 3 ;derived Stems . .

h-omen generis masculini . . . . . . . . . . . .

Nomen generis feminini . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NOLUISjlZ "in" and "an" . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Noun vitb Personal suffixes . . . . . . . . . . . .
BIBLIOGRAPIIY.
History of literature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cbrestomathies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grammars . . . . ...............
SVI CONTEXTS.

Page
Lexicography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Koran and Islam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Histoiy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Geography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
PoeQ- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3Iiscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

-4. For translation into English:

I. The history of Queen Bilkis from the prophetic legends
of ~ a ' l a b i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
IL Extracts from the biographies of the first three Chalifs
from the "golden meadows" of Xasudi . . . . . . .
B. For translation into Arabic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GLOSSARY.
To part X of the Chrestomathy ............. 109
To part B of the Chrestomath~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
 P A R T I.
..-

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

l a. The Co~zsonunfs. The Arabs 01-iginally

used the Syriac character and the Syriac alphabet,
in which the characters are in the same order, as
in the Hebrew alphahet. Remains of this older orcler
are still preserved i n the numerical values of the
letters (cf. the tahle). I n later times the 1ettel-s were
seldom used as numerals. By means of diacritical
points the Arabs early distinguished a uuml,er of
sounds wllictl in that older alphabet were not separ-
ated from one another. And many characters became
by ;~bb~eviation so similar to -one another that such
diacritical marks were necessary t o distinguish them.
These similar forms were afterwards placed next one
another in the alphabet. Thus the letters stand now
in the following order which is tolerably general. The
alphabet consists of 25 consonants of the following
forms. These are written and read from right to left,
A*
-- P----

Figures Value
-m - -. - ---
.-
tL
2.: - 3.5
Sames g$ zz
2
7
g&
c ; E.* -=5p
- m
Pronunciation
5a ;
< Z"
2 5 . S := ' ,
s o

- .-- -
- . -+
I
5
2- "-
54
F_---
0 5"
F --.p
3 >
-- ..-
.-

5 8
1 -!l*Aiif ' t l- - cf. 5 2 and i 1 S

-8

:3 %bT% j t t 400
- * in thing t 500
n
orig. g hard; litter

-*
IE c + } g as in Italian
I giorno; English j
g 3 3

I %L
H112 ~tron~hmithfriction I! S
n
- German hard ~ h ;

a "
i g C j CllL
c f
scotch ch in loch 111 - 600
8 n%l
J1j 3 - - d on the teeth d 4
English soft th as -l
!l Q\; I)hd 3 LL -- in this ;1 700

l0 z!; Rfi
1 i - - dental r
weak vocalic S,
r 200 l

11 a: zs )
l
:i i
. - } like French and
) English z
z 7 T
I

sin l .
" 'lard S
German sch
s i 6 0 p
&. shin
S
13 1 G +, English ~ 1 1 g 300 W

* In such technical terms it is usual to leave the ending S i. e. un

(cf. 5 3 b) unpronounced after the fashion of modern Arabic.
 - -- - - - -- --
p
-

Figores Value
-~ - --- -. . .-p .

4 - -
--- . ,l l i I
:L Sad 1s 90:
14
p / r a 'emphatic S :
.
15
16,
I
$12 Dlid
~lb
-C

TFt
+ + ; L iupperpalhtald
b k .b. i? 1
l

emphatic t
i/d t l
,

800:'
.
9,'
1 -
l'i %& za h 1 i
1
l
h Q weal; emphatic S

1s d+ Ain
S c, ing the violent- i c l
70,

g 1000,
If soi?
& vaf I deep emphatic k
I<nf
'l k
L; Lam
I!
l' 1
S
,+? Mim I in
'l
B '
Niin
C;1,:' 1 11
-
gLi6 H5 h
5 .
waw
,!, '/English W
l
iii YFt )' Y
+j 2. THE TOKEL SIGXS.

and are in part connected with one another, in

1)art left unconnected, as the table on pages 4 and
.5 ~ 1 1 0 ~ ~ .

b. When a (So. 21;) standing a t the end of a

rrord denotes the feminine termination, two dots are
placed ofer i t , to show that it is to be pronounced
like t (So. 3j; thus X.
c. Certain letters are very frequently, especially
at the beginning of n-01-ds, placed not alongside one
another, but above one another: this is the case with
the characters + (Xos. 5 -7), e. g. instead
of S+, s EZc
instead of S+, g instead of sse etc.
Instead of L! (Kos. 23 and l ) usually Y or is written;
this coniiectiou is so frequent that the character is
even reckoned by the Arabs as an extra letter with
the name of Lrim-Alii'.
2 a. The r o ~ c e l signs. Originally the Arabs
had signs only for the long vowels Z, I, 21, and the
diphthongs au, ui the second part of which they
treated as a consonant; the signs were t ( N o - l ) for Z,
, (KO- 27) for Ic and (after u for) nu, 6 (No 28) for i
and (after a for) ui. These signs were regarded as
yi6iescelzt ; the sign of a consonant's being without a
vowel (cf. 3 c) was however in later times added
,
only to and iS in- those cases, where they repre-
 2. TEE Y O K E L SIGSS. 7
..
sented the diphtllongs. Examples: Jb kriia, sb.u,
S U/ FJ "
;J
: ;?blili, 6ai:un (cf. 5 3 b), i7j nouniaa.
b. In the oldest writing the 6 is not in all cases
represented by t, but is left sometimes unrepresented.
This non-representation is the rule in a series of
very common words; generally however in such cases
a perpendicular stroke is placed over the c o n s o ~ ~ a n t
which is to be pronounced with long 8; e. g. 19;
,
(see 5 5 ) , o+3+
' " i j
(instead of i,%i)h@C, i&j.ail~hu nr-
ruhmEau. Frequently however in OUL- editions only
1

A is printed in such cases for the 5, e. g . !&S.

c. In some few words after an U denotes, not

the pronunciation au but C, probably a n originally
,
indistinct 2;in this case also the perpendicular stroke
S 1-
is usual, e. g. GnyEtun "life" (on the other hand
the same word with suffixes is written with 1, ~ L ; L
hay6tuhu "his life").
d. As the final letter iS likewise in many words
serves to denote a long 6; in such cases i t (like, in c )
does not receive the sign of being non-vocalic (S 3 c),
I
e. g. &) (&) r m 6 ; with s ~ f f i*xL;; )1~niEhu.
)
/U 9
REP. Instead of dzsny6, as i t ought to be
written according to the rules for the formation
8 8 2. TEE SHORT VO\\.ELS.

of nouns 51 b, is written, t o avoid two 6 ' s

coming together.
e. Sorneti~nesail I is added after a final 22 or u~c,
without affecting tlie pronunciation, e. g. ! ~ ~ ~ . l a t u b ~
;14 runzurt; this 1 was originally used in the hlSS.
to separate a final ;from the following worcl.
$ 3 a. The short z.o?uels were originally quite
unrepresented (many boolis, especially those printed
in the east, are printed without any vowels a t all);
in later times the folloiving signs were used for the
short vowels (and, in connection with the signs men-
tioned in $ 2, for the long vovels also):
5 ,.L..- S c,
1) li&
(to be pronounced
Fatlla (or
U
r F a t b j L for tlie vowel u
o r e in certain cases), e. g.
.,.
&X:

X.utuZu, ;I6 &Z/o.

FJ,
2) ii,,..d'
L - Kesra (or
S L.

i Kesr) -r for the vowel

' 7-
.yahi'u.
i, e. g.
. . (iodibir,
ss. 2.
3) ii+~t) Damma (or p Damm) _i- for the vowel
' '/
e. g. 4. 7 ' .
21, yaktubu; U&
, yufi7tu.
b. When these signs for the short vowels are
doubled a t the end of a word, they are t o be pro-
s '.
nounced with a final ?z (Nunation, Arabic &p
 C C 5,-
Tanwin), e. g. . an l, wl~ich
Srnn2si72, J+ ) rc~iulzlt~;
has no influence on the pronunciation is added as a n
outward sign to the nunation un, e. g. $ 1; ?12i77a12;
this l is left only in those cases where the nuna-
tion is affixed to the fem. ending b' (cf. above 1 a)
*/ )L.,
o r where an 1, or in its stead
e. g. &,S~,G ?~z~rk.I;Xbci/crn,
a G quiescing in a , already stands a t the end of a
* Y
word, e. g. G)-
ribatz, e~ hz~dan ( 5 2 c) ; lil<ewise
sometiilles after (5 4).
c. Tile fact of a consonant's not being accom-
CJ-0 , r
paniecl by a vowel is shown by A b.+ Gezrna, also
7 ,
called Jy?,, Sukan [LLrest'7],e. g. Y 0,
w
i
dr siifafrtr,
a 5 2). On the omission of this sign
L.',
~ n z u s ' a i t (cf.
cf. 9 5 a. A consonant, which is to be pronounced
without a vowel, is called "quiescent".

4. Hut~zza. The sign i

y Hamza
5, 0
(the form of .
which has arisen from E 'Ain) is peculiar t o the Arabic
writing as a further consonantal sign. I t denotes the
cutting off of the stream of breath, which can precede
or follow a vowel; i t corresponcls therefore a t the
beginning of a syllable t o the Greek spiritus lenis.
I n the transliteration we denote Hamza by a t the y ;

beginning of a word we often leave i t unrepresented.

I n most cases an t d l i l occurs as the bearer of this
Hamza: the Blif has in this case an essentially differ-
ent function from that noted in $ 2. When an i
sound folloxs, the sign ,is placed under the t.
5. S S
Examples :x. t 'u~/rru,i,,LI ibilun, &.,, 1 ' u r a ~ / ~ a n ;
/ .D ...
JL
S&. , eSu .
,=M

sa'ulrr, t ,?-a-sioz ;I 4 ik-I'CL', 11 Ia'-'n-/n~~.In the last

c
/ J-. . ?-
three instances Hamza closes the syllable; in the last
case the folloiving s ~ l l a b l eagain begins with Hnmzn.
11. Before or after an i or 21 sound the letters
3
and occur in most cases as the bearer of Hamza
(in such a case is vithout the two points), e. g.
.b.
3$ ba usa,
. Y
j.3
<.E> Y ~ E Y
yu'laru, /,Ad1" yu'ataru; &+.di'ta,
a

/ /"
. . ga'ibu,
/ #

L yuliari'e.
.
c. After a long vowel, as also in most cases after
Sukfin, Hamzs has usually no bearer, but is placed
on or above the line, e. g. z-G"! ircjir'un, zy bar'zm,
U.

1s
.. -
5
rE,& n~anriZatar; h ?u!?alun.

5 5. TeSdld. a. The sharpened pronunciation

of a consonant is shown by the sign of reduplication
- is
5
5
-, called
U ,

Tegdid or G gedd (the sign

borrowed from the initial of this word), e. g.
5 2 ,-
,G S

sabbu,
,L '. t(wa!~?ll~Zun.This reduplication of a consonant
i"
is either (as in the above examples) due t o the cha-
racter of a nominal or verbal form, or is the result
of assinlilatiou. I n the latter case the consonant
assinlilated to the following one is for the most part
e s ~ s e s s e din writing, but does not receive the sign
of -vowellessness-as i t really no longer exists in
2 E
respect of the pronunciation-, e. g. -a'! to be pro-
-* 1
nounced 'ul-utttc, %&l n&mtti.

b. This assimilation (which however in the

examples just given is not always represented in
writing) takes place always with t h e l of the article
V I

JI, when it stands before the consonants G, a, 5,

j : j,v , v,
@,&, b,b, J, (i. e. before dentals,
5 , , 0 5 ,

sibilants and r , l, n) e. g. '5l;ili ettubirzc, ,LA!

, LIG '
J;
r!!uiiu, 4 1 eBamsu (the sun), b u t [email protected]
(the moon). On account of the antithesis represented
by the last two stereotyped examples, these are called
solar letters in opposition to the lunar letters, with
which the l of the article cannot be assimilated.

c. The words & min, 0 - r

alz,
" 5
'at& (and

''
L's
I 'in) are for the most part written as one with some
short words beginning with mor J 2, andthen assimilate
r
their final ,, to the following sound, e. g.
,E L E
G f-i~iirniii
from 1
; mir m;, li 1 from Y '(fa lii.

6. Rh;lm ".
a. There are a great number of
words in Arabic, which begin with an easily vanish-
ing vox~el,succee(1ed by a quiescent consonant, or
more properly which begin with the quiescent con-
sonant itself. I n such cases the vowel or the
L 7-7 Y 7 0

helping ~ol-iel (e. g. &ii! u,$-tul insteacl of &X: &tug

regularly falls a v a j after another word. As a sign of
S."
this elision ;x;l~j
?uu;la (from is placecl over
the I, which is the bearer of the vowel sign, e. g.
_'-= , L
J( 4 Zli7ltzihuzTri; the two words so joined must
4.
/ -2. .
then be pronounced in close connection. Such an
Xlif bearing Wasla is called a connective Alif, in
opposition to a disjunctive Alif, i. e. an Alif ~ ~ i t l z
Hamza (cf. 5 4).
b. When a connecti~eAlif stands a t the beginriing
of a paragraph, i t is pronouncerl a s a full vowel, but
in writing only the corresponding vowel sign may be
' 7 . z '
placed on the Alif, never Harnza, e. g. J,+l arrudh,
" i u J g ~ alongside
4 of
D ) O r O * .

1 Jb t o be pronounced
 c. I n the latter example the division of syllables
now is 66-1012-rub. If the vowel preceding a connec-
tive Alif is long, i t is pronounced short in the now
0 7 0 0

closed syllable, e. g. L 1 ! / 3
. prop. fi-l;fulL-i, now
however forming the syllables fil-fill-X-i ; likewise
&r 2).
- h = - - - h
5,"- 7..

!,&h ( 5 S e)

d. If the word before a connective Alif ends in s

vowelless (quiescent) consonant, i t receives a helping
vowel. The most usual helping vowel*(in such a case
.oro6 _.*
is i,e. g. L!.&! wy <u?.abnfi-hfbda (instead of
/..
F
U
Sometimes original vowels return, e. g.
-0s-

hzlnzz~-Zkcifirz7nn; the first word is in other

&?F
cases pronounced p hum, but was originally pro-
nounced humz7. Sometimes the same vowel is chosen
as auxiliary, as stands under the initial Alif when
0 _o
unconnected, e. g. JW!
- connected with the article
/

& =
7
JL&L,~!
U "SO*

aZisti+bZZu with helping vowel L -

The nunation (S 3 b) also is treated as ending in a

e. g.
7 , " -
consonant; in this case i t is most usual to add a n i,
7 7 Y
- -1 &j
. rabuluni-smuhu.
 Rnr. Tire preposition ,;away from" is
cllanged to 2,
and the preposition & L.from''to
before a connective Alif: before the article howe-ier it
is changed to 3 ..
e. The cases too, in vhich a wo1.d ends in a so-
called rliphthong (cf. $ 2), are subject t o the same
rule. viz. that a quiescent final consonant must re-
ceive a helping rove1 before a connective Alif: this
helping TOR-elis u or i corresponrling to or 6, e. g. ,- - ,
L,T;:~-
> n~li;!uful~'z~-IZZhi instead
L of d!l ;b,
by. L

/ *
.'
.
<l
&
- .2riifuyi-ibu&ur.uti instead of !p!!"'L
,-<be

-2
: ;1
(Likewise with the ending 5 2 e).
f. I n some cases the connective 'Alif is left out
altogether in writing:
1) with the article 46 when the particles 3 Zi or
Y
*
/ Y C

j 7a precede, e. g. cmU lil[jufii for p ~ f -Y ,

7 0 O < C Y ~ ~ ~ 0 - c .

&&A! Iuimu~du for J++!Y.

9 0
2) with the word &<,! "son". whenit is in apposition
t o the proper name of the son, and governs the name
"
.OU

of the father, e.g. &.*J.,..,li(

7
G
m~sliv~~-bn~r-lwniidi.
Y

-
Muslim son of al-Walid. St the beginning of a line
0-
however d41 is written in such a case.
 3) with the word '1 ismlrx !:name7'.after the pre-
y--
' ^ j

i, hi, e. g. aljl t*! hismi-ZZEhi "in the name

of God".
7. Neddo. a. In Arabic two Alifs cannot
stand together. When this would happen, only one
5 5

-
Alif is written with the sign b'& Medcla or Medd -
placecl over it. This sign has arisen f1.0111 AA?
Medd.
At the beginning of & word or syllable Medcla has at
the same time the value of Hamza; the sign Fat12 is
- 5
also omitted, e. g. &S\ EX-ilun for J.<\ \, i;(\j.
Ci
kz.zlt-'i2lun
B E;-d'

for Ll(!y;
~i 5 0 , -
likewise &l Emunu. for
' .es
I, s s the H a m z : ~
of the second Alif is lost after the first.
REALC?- rn7E '(he has seen", for example be-
L1 5<
comes with suffixes according to 5 2 e properly a(!
9

1
rn3rlhG7but is written i7-
1-
b. As a Hamza following a long !_Ln is written
on the line ($ 4 c) withqut an Alif ns bearer, the Alif
. preceding such a Hamza receives Medda in most cases,
though this Medcla has no effect on the pronunciation
of the word, e. g. S . & &'a f o r i ~ I+&:
, tofi?'n&;
7 - --/

so also where, or 6 act as bearers of Hamza, e. g.

E
atihtx~unu,$G +z'i/un.
l&--
S,&.\
16 5 8. TEE SYLLABLE. 5 9. THE TOTE.

REX. Two also are not willingly written

:'S

alongside one another (even if the fornler is merely

a bearer of Hamza after 5 4 c), e. g. tJ7&
b - &'C
is written
6--
tjb,aj113
9 5
C Z E ' E ~ I ~(David)
'5 -
d7t3 (often
wrongly without Harnza,
'' -
1~ j.
5 S. The SyIZuble. Every syllable begins wit11
n consonant. A short syllable consists of a con-
sonant with a short vowel, e. g. the second syllable of
LI;o~ 8 - f Ca; long s ~ l l a b l econsists either 1) of ri con-
sonant and a long vowel, e. g. the syllable mc;l in the
above example, or 2) of a consonant and a short
~ o w e with
l a consonant following, e. g. both syllables
so . (likewise of U
of J..i&-c~t-lz~lz
i
S 0.
p mau-tun), or seldom
3) o f a shut syllable with a long vowel, e. g. the first
6;
syllable of iroG ?nEd-da-iun. Such a syllable can be
called a cloubly long syllable.
5 9. The fone. The accent. in Arabic is thrown
formarcl till it meets a long syllable; when there is
no long s~llable,the accent is on the first syllable of
the word; the final simple long syllable is not reck-
oned n long syllable for purposes of accentuation.
L <l&rabct,
C .

Examples with s h o r t final syllables:

E!
L,
-1
istiinhro; examples with long final syllables:
S
& tnn~cimtuml!,au: fcircltcn,
i'
 5 10. SIGSS FOE SCMDCES A S D A.I%ERET~IITIOSS. 17

Exceptions: A s ~ l l a b l ewith connective Alif (5 6),

.. .O

as e.g. in -
(cf. 24), cannot bear the accent;
i t must therefore be pronounced iftcica7u; in like
manner inseparable prapositive monosyllabic par-
.
titles like j, d (cf. 5 70) do not alter the accent, e. g.

5 10. S ~ ~forZ nzc9nbers

S rrnd ubbreviotio?~~.The
usual signs for the Arabic numerals are the
following :
+,1, P, f, 6, 4, v7 h,
0 , 1 , 2 , 3 , 4, 5 , 6 , 7 , S , 9 .
The tens, hundreds, &c. are written on the left of
the units &,C., e. g. tq 19, !AA*1885.
Some of the most common abbreviations are:
- - ,' 5 X,
(

,+S = tLt! &

*.. aZuihi-ssaZc7nzzc Peace he upon him !
+ = &L; $i; &Ut & : o i ~ a - ~ i ~'fai ~a u i ~wn-
E - E
zi
saliamu God he gracious to him and give him prosperity
(of the prophet).
 The Pronoun.
11. a. The pronomina personutia are either
sepurutu or suffixu. The pronomina personuliu sel~a-
rnta have the following forms
Sing. Plur. Dual
I. Pers. LT f
pi
" F

11.Pers.
mast.
/ 0 5

.S }
0:': I LST
{fern. +l &lj

111. Pers. jrnasc.

(fern. 2.
In connection with ;
and 3 (cf. 5 70) the pro-
nouns of the 3. Pers. sing. may lose their first vowel
- 0 , - 0 .

"S g. p,,&.
 5 11. THE PRONOUN. 19

b. The pronoazi?zo perso?zaZiil suffisa which in

connection with a noun express a genitive, and in
connection with a verb express an accusative, are as
follows:

Sing. Plus. Dual

I with the Noun G, /

I- (Iwith the Verb 2- L-

c. Before a connective Alif (S G d) the suffixed

~ r o n o u nof the 1. Perk Sing. often receives its origi-
r . OIJ .0 5

pal U - * (5?U?sIor
as auxiliary vowel, e. g. .uljiXJl
. -
&WUi&&!.After E, i and oi the nominal suffix
of the 1. Pers. Sing. has the form 2 ya. Sometimes
the suffix of the 1. Pers. Sing. is denoted not by ey7
but simply by the vowel Kesr e. g. 9)my
, lord!
thus after e. g. &L? .
/ with the suffix of the 1. Pers.
Sing. j. ~or ;
i.G
- 'o)ib6bi (cf. 5 4 b). .
20 S 14. THE DE3IOSSTRATITE PEOSOGKS.

7 " 9 G 7
d. The suffixes k, b,p,@ after a preceding i
sound take the rove1 i instead of ZL, and thus become
G,+ >,e. g. d C instead of &G.
/ / F before
a connecti~eAlif is generally pronounced
7 7
h.- he
suffixes T a n d ;so before a connective Alif take their
original form F +. and
For furt.her remarks on the connection of the pro-
nomina suffixa see $ GS and Table XXI. .
e. The reflexive pronoun, when a certain amount
of emphasis is required, is generally expressed by
the word a ~ / S u ia i ~ ~ to
~ which
l n , the corr;spond-
ing suffixes are attached; in many cases the personal
pronoun sufficiently expresses the reflexive.
12. The demonstrafiz'e P P . O I ~ O Z / ? Z Sare the follow-
ing (for the inflexion cf. 5 53 a):
a. Tlie simple pronoun, which selclom occurs:
RIasc. Fem. '

Sing.

Dual {
~orn.
g05 CS?
6
( Gen. Acc. $5 Q+
U
:

Plur.
 S 12. THE DEYONSTEATIVE PCONOUXS. 21

This simple pronoun is compounded :

b. with the demonstrative particle 6 , which is
generally written defectively (or less correctly G
2 b). Hence arises the usual demonstrative pronoun,
'referring to the nearer object = this (Germ. "dieser",
Lat. "hic") :
Masc. Fem.
Sing.

Plur. /' /-
c. with a suffix of the 2. Pers., which in the older
language, especially in that of the Koran, varies
between the Sing. Dual and Plural according as one
9 I
or more persons are referred to (e. g. i;Xlb, l&!;);
- .
otherwise however d is used without change. Between
this d and the simple demonstrative pronoun the de-
monstrative particle J can be inserted. Thus two
forms of the demonstrative pronoun arise, referring
to the remoter object = that (Germ. ('jener", Lat.
511en).
22 13. THE XELATII-E PROBOL'SS

llasc. Fem.
Sing. (&l& &S)
/ , & (L),
..* * a.
A!;,
, &L., &G.
-
4

Dual {
Gen. Aco. a-..s,
db.5
'W O
G;,
C ...
.. G
' * 5 -
Plur. (&,l), seldom
13. The relutire pronouns are' the following:
,
a. - W.

who, which, titat, originally a demonstrative

compounded with the article (hence the connective
Alif); i t is inflected in the following manner:
Masc. Fem.
Sing. G*

Dual { Norn.
3 -
!'a
C -U.

Gen. Acc. d 2 ~ J f
G, 0 5 ,
Plur. &-l! CS'..W!,
," &l*
b. G
(without inflexion): the one who; one who
(also Plu.) .
G (without inflection) = the one which; something
which.
BE 556
c. fem. G\(inflected in the Sing.) = bhe one
who (mostly before the nominative); also compounded
 0 .is
l ~ i t hthe preceding dei.f = every one who; whoever;
-- whichever.
5 14. The interrogative pro7zou72s are:
U .
who? (mas. and fe~n.)?
G what, frequently strengthened by the addition
of thk demonstrative 15 : 15 whut then ?
z SiiS
21, fern. i+!
S

what sort of?

&EX. 3is only inflected (like Is
when it stands
absolutely: its inflection is as follows:
Masc. Fem.
Sing. Nom. $, Gen. &,ACC. G W,
" -. ~
U - '
l c

Gen. Acc. e*
'*.
Dual Rom. &G, &h &&a,
0 0 - O /
'
d
O

'/
Plur. Nom. &p,Gen. Acc. &G; U O l d

; in shortened t o ,; e. g.
After a preposition 1 2
why? The interrogative word 3 how many? is con-
nected wit11 the interrogative pronoun G.,/

Chapter 11.
T h e Verb.
5 15. The great majority of Arabic verbs has three
radicals; a small minority has four radicals. The root

*) This and the following are pausal foims with rejected

final vowel.
24 5 16. THE YERE,

form, according to which the verbs are arranged in

grammar ancl dictionary, is the 3. Pers. Sing. Perfect.
The verbal, and especially the nominal forms are
named throughout after the paradigm of the verb
(to do).
REX. All Arabic dictionaries arrange the no-
minal and -verbal derivatives under this root form;
one must therefore, in order to find these three rad-
icals easily, pay strict attention to the consonants,
which in nominal and verbal formations are adcled
to the stem as prefixes, affixes or infixes.
516. From the root form, or tlie so-called first
stem, other stems are derived by regular changes:
these stems are named either by the paradigm of J&
(e. g. the stem iftucala),or usually by numbers (e. g.
the eighth stem, so also in the clictionary denoted
simply by VIII). The following stems, the order of
which is to be carefully noted, are the most usual:

REM. NO. IX and especially No. XI belong to

'
the rarer forms; still more rare are XI1 &+l,
.
 $9 17, 18. TEE I. s: u. STEMS. 25
.s.o ..O,O O.U.
XI11 Jell
.S I V &US/,
. XV &.&l. . - The derived
forms in use in each verb, and the change of meaning
in t,hese derived forms-are given in the dictionaries
under each individual verb.
5 17. In the majority of cases the root form I is
G, e. g. G to kill, alongside of this,
in most verbs of intransitive meaning, occurs the form
-.
. (cf. %P), e. g. 3I" to be ill; also the form
(cf. ?a?), this latter form has always an intransitive
- 9 .
meaning, e. g. c;',=. to be heautifid. Sometimes one
of the forms
. or G occurs in the same verb
alongside of G;sometimes both forms G and Jz
occur in the same verb.
REM. The arabic verb frequently expresses that
a person wishes to perform an action, or allows it
,
.c-

to be performed; thus, e. g. & he killed 7zim can

9 / 0 9 c - -
. also mean "he wished to kill him1], and aiiif t, 2
;r
'he cut ORhis heud" (prop. neck) may also mean "he
cazdsed his head to he cut off."
-
$ 1s. The 11. stem G (corresponding
to the
Pi'el of Hebrew) denotes in general a greater intensity
of the action expressed by the verb; this intensive
26 S$ 19, 20. THE III. b: IT. STEJIS.

force can be referred to the subject, object, or access-

.
<
W.

to kill sereval, to massrrcre,

o r j circumstances, e. g.
(R-ith reference to the object). lfost usually howerer
this form is causative, e. g. to k n ~ f u ,$.to.cuvse
to k n o ? ~ ,to teach; also declarative, e. g. L& to lie,
3 fo consir7el; to declic~eto lie, U lirrr; and deno-
.- . coZIect m2 uvazy ($.A+).
minatire ,j&to
G,

19. The 111. stem expresses the desire, or

the attempt, to perform the action on a person, to
influence a person or thing, e. g. G to X-ill, ...to
.
seek to kill, to fight; ,dto
.
C

write, ~ u t corvespoxcl
o
7zL:irh one; the latter is then transitive with accusative
of the person.

20. The IT. stem G (the Hifcil of the Hebrew)

has a causative meaning, e. g.
coaditiofi, to b i n g into good co?rdilios. Very
often in this form there occur denominatives with a
concealed transitive meaning, which from our point
of view are apparent11 intransitive, and express the
idea of action in a definite direction, e. g. p(
/ . 0 5

to do good; frequently moreover this form is used for

verbs, which contain the idea of going to a place, of
entering or coming to a period of time or a condi-
.. uS!s to go ,- 0 s
tion, e. g. L,
.i
the time of morning, to do
to the West,
e +! to enter into
so?nethi?zg in the morning,
to conze to the top.
- ..
Gi
21. The V. stem J.SU (the Hebrew Hithpdel),
a sort of middle, is derived from the second stem and
has a reflexive (according to circumstances also a
reciprocal) meaning, e. g. F to make one'sselfgreut,
.Gi ,-

.& to allow oneself to he taught, to learn (Scotch %o

learn one'sself"). Sometimes a verb in the V. form
expresses the idea of, acting the part of, giving
onesself out as, e. g. to give onesself out for a pro-
phet, to uct the pad of a prophet.

22. The VI. stem &G.,

derived from the
111. stem, is the reflexive form of this 111. stem, and
has a reflexive or reciprocal meaning, e. g.
.... Y
Ace to
.
prove onesself clever, sharp, &kj.to fight one mother.
/ / U.
5 23. The VII. stem (the Hebrew Niphcal,
with connective Alif after 8 G a), mostly derived from
the I. stem,'is a middle or reflexive form of this I. stem,
e. g. F t o Break, ;".l to go to pieces, to t e a k up.
2S 3s xi,95. THE TIII. P IS. STEUS.

, .O
/

21. Tile 'S'III. stem ,b!(with connective Alif

6 a) is likeaise a middle and reflexive foim, for the

most part of the I. stem, e. g.

- .-O

to oppose ol~e'sself;:
sometimes also ~ ~ i recil)rocal
th meaning, e. g. ,+,,
*
=L.!
H *

fo quarl-el c i t h otze unothel-.

REX. In the case of roots beginning with @,

&
,, L , P the u of the VIII. stem is changed to
the emphatic fc, and in the case of dentals is even
assimilated to the first radical, e. g.
,,.; +!
p!instead of
G!-,F ,-G
or pc! instead of G!
from ,+L;
likewise c;, is sometimes assimilated to a
- - !from 4,
,
preceding G, e. g. 4
1or
*.
+ -5
prop.
5

/ *

**' ..41. after 3, 5, j the is changed to the soft a,

. ..-
e. g. SISj! instead of from S!..
4/"-.: 3!- ). 1' Q) S! instead of
-
5 25. The IX. stem g! (likewise the XI. $G!,
both with connective Alif) are used of verbs which
expressed the possession of inherent qualities, or bod-
'G 0
ily deformities, e. g, from the stem+: ,ho! to be
yeNoiv; from the stem ),&: ),S!to be one eyed.
G
, 0
 ,$ 26. T H E X . STE3L. S 27. T H E QCADRILITERAL STEUS. 29
.-'J1o
26. The X. stem J.&f (with connective
Alif) is i; the first instance a reflexive of the IV. stem
0 'r ,,U*
&l, e. g. from the stem Li;;3) IV. +.,l to sadden,
X. &.+L,
..0-0
to sudden ot2e'sself, to make one'sself sad.
Very frequently the X. stem denotes also the wishing
,.OS

or begging something for one'sself, e. g. from sihl to

" -0.
J
pardon, X. I to beg for purdolz; or to consider a
;"-
thing to be so and so, e. g. from
..us to nmke necessary, X. e-f
++,
/

r
,/

,U C
to benecessury,
U
IV. . /
to co?zside?-
something necessary.
27. The stems with four radicals are denoted
in the nominal and verbal forms by the paradigm
CC0'
J.h
(i. e. with the help of a fourth radical added to
G),and have two chief forms, of which the first
corresponds to the 11. stem of the triliteral verb, the
/."CC

second LMra-, corresponds to the V. stem of the

triliteral verb, e. g. 3
. 3
. to throw down,
/ "/.
. .
to fall down.
REX. The stems 111. U!
and IV.
.,*/U
S!(the
latter corresponding to the IX. stem of the triliteral
G
-
verb) are rare, e. g. c)U!to 0
be .quiet, from a stem.
'$L.
30 5 B. THE PASSIVE. 5 '29. THE TESSES.

2s'. h Passive stands alongside of the Active:

i t is formed in the Perfect in such a manner that the
series tb-i-a (i with the second, and a with the third
radical) takes the place of the a vowels, e. g. Act. I.:
Pass.:,&; the additional syllables of the de-
l&
rived forms likewise receive the vowel U, e. g. Pass. V
Le,V111 g i (with connective Alif).
29. The Arabic verb has two principal tenses,
a P~rfect, which in general represents a finished
action: and an Inzpe~fect, which in general represents
an unfinished action. The Imperfect is formecl by
;
the addition of the prefix ya in the Act. of the I.,
V., ?'I., QII., VIII., IX. and X. forms; and of the
prefix J the Act. of the II., 111.) IV. and in the
~ Z in

Pass. of all forms. The second radical receives in the

I. stem the vowel U, i or U, which is specially mention-
ed in the dictionary in the case of each verb (e. g.
Imp. U). Those Verbs, which in the Perf. have the form
(with i vowel), as well as all Passives, have a in
the second radical of the Imperf., thus Imperf. Act.
U-; Pass. g. As regards the derived stems
the second radical always receives i (with the excep-
tion of the V. and VI. stems, which have a), e. g,
Imperf. 11. ... but V.
Y ../
 5 30. TEE 3IOODS. g 31. THE IIII'ERATIVE. 31

3 30. I n the Imperfect different moods are dis-

tinguished, viz. 62dicmtioe, Sz~bj-lozctiveand Jussive.
They are distinguished as follows; in the Indicative
the last radical, when i t closes the word, is always
pronounced with U, e. g.
7
&G,
0

Imperf. 111. &G; in

the Subjunctive with a, e. g. G:;and in the Jussive
".".
is left without a vowel, e. g. J.+. Besides these there
is a double modus energicus, which is formed by
affixing the syllables atzna or un t o the Imperfect,
thus or $L&.
REX. AS the modus energicus is of relatively
rare occurrence, i t is given i n the Tables only in the
paradigms of the usual strong verb. I n the remaining
verbs i t can be easily formed after tile analogy
of these.
5 31. The Imperative agrees in vocalisation ancl
ending with the Jussive; except t h a t there is no pre-
fixed 2 . I n the Imperative of the I. stem, when the
first consonant has no vowel, a n auxiliary vowel is i n
all cases prefixed (i. e. with a connective Alif); this
vowel however vanishes in pronunciation when the
word no longer stands alone, e.g. G!
but
,,, O Q , .
Jb,
likewise in the VI1.-X. stems. The Imperative has
the same energetic by-forms as the Imperfect.
 32 32. FOR3lS OF THE D C I L .

REI\I. I n the I~nperativeof the I. stem

is used 14

as the ausiliary rowel if the seconct radical has zi,

',L?
e. g. ,&I; on the other hand i is used, if the seconcl
radical has a or i, e. g. g!,&g!.
S 32. I n the Perfect, Imperfect and Imperative be-
sides Singular and Plural there are also Dual forins
of the second and third persons. The verbs are in-
flected b ~ -the addition of iodified and shortened
forms of the personal pronouns or nominal Dual and
Plural endings (cf. on the endings tini and Gnu of the
the Imperf. ~ndic-. $ 53 a) t o the stemforms
L". 2
G and
h.
.- These latter
H enilings, like the ending .cnu of
the 11.Pers. Fern. Sing. Imperf., reject the syllable nn
in the Subjunctive, Jnssire, and Imperative. The 1,
which is found after the final ,L i n the Perf. and in
.these forms of the Imperfect and Imperative, has no
eflect on the pronunciation cf. 5 2 e.-In the Im-
perfect in place of the prefix of the 3. Masc., the
prefix S is used for the forms of the 2. Pers., and those
of the 3. Fern. (except the 3. Fem. Plu.); for t h e 1.
S

Sing. 1, is used, and j for the 1. Plu.

REN. I n t h e Imperfect of the derived stems,
which have the prefix 5 (V. and VI.), a n Aphm-esis
 5 33. THE PBETICIPLES. 34. THE ISFISITIYES. 33
.
of the personal prefix j. is sometimes found, e. g.
9 r. Y -.,.
bj.instead of 3;6;tS'.
9 The participles-the
33. active is generally'
called nomen agentis the passive aonzen patienlis-
are in all derived stems formed by the prefixing of '
the syllable 2 mu; i n the Act. the second raiical has
i, in the Pass. U; e.g.11. Part. Act.
S.".,
b;
Pass. *.
Sc.,

The Part. Act. and Pass. of the I. stem $6 and

",q.
Jy are to be specially noted.
REM. The Arabic participles as such express no
S
idea of time; hence e. g. $6 can mean also, one
5 7 0 .

who hus killed; i ! , ~one mho will, or should be kiZled

5 34 a. The Infinitive (nomen v e ~ b i of) the I. stem
has very various forms, and is therefore in the diction-
aries given in the case of each separate verb. One
S"/
of the most common forms is Jzj, e. g. jli' to kill,
killing; the Infinitives of the verbs L'(5 28) a r e as
S /. ..
S
a rule h,e.
S , Y
g. from + L : ,- a fieing angry.
The form is also frequent. Infinitives with pre-
S 9 , 9. 0 . ,

fixed 2 are likewise found, e. g. J,io or (for

several forms from the same verb often occur to-
gether, sometimes with moclifications of meaning)
from &S
. to enter.
r!
34 35. THE VEUBA 2iEDI-Z G C X I S A T Z .

S .
b. The Infinitive of the 11. stem is
c,
G
S
... or
.
g;C*hj. (the latter form alrrays mitli verbs ult. &); the
Infiniti~eof the 111.stem is i$
or ~ G G (the latter
form is like the Part. Pass. with the fern. ending).
The I n h i t i r e s of the IV., VII., VIII., IX. and X. stems
are formed b~ the insertion of an n before the last
radical: before this G all other 6's of the Perf. be-
come y's, IV. , ,1 & \ (with connective
*.

Ei
-.
Alif), V111 J b t (id.),
L
..(id.),
IX. JL i X. 3 G . .l
(id.) The Infinitives of the V. and VI. stems take u
S 5..
after the second radical, V. U, YI. &G.
REM. The Arabic Infinitives contain no teml~oral
idea, and can stancl equally well either in an active
S*.
or in a passive sense, e. g. &G a killing, or a Bei?lg
kitled.

The conjugation of the quadriliteral verbs is

shown in the table of paradigms Xo. 111.

3 35. The verba medize geminatse, i. e. those

verbs, the second and third radicals of which are
identical, e. g. (cf. the table of paradigms No,
)f~
IV-VII) must also be reckoned among the common
strong verbs.
 35. TEE VERBA 31EDIxZ GEJIISATZ. 35

a. A contraction of the last two radicals occurs

in all those cases; in which the first, second, and
third radical are pronounced with short vowels, e. g.
p- from )ij
S /
.d

(uncontracted verbs of the forms .

&>
d d

6 d".

and sometimes occur); 3. S. Imperf. BII. +.

) CO.
from)?; likewise if after two short vowels the
third lradical has a long vowel, e. g. 3. Dual Masc.
Perf. 1''
i' fj>,in most cases when the first rad-
from
ical has an 5, e. g. 3. Perf. 111. from c% (in Pass.
) ))
however +I.
b. If the first radical is vowelless, and the second
is furnished with a short vowel, contraction takes
place, and the vowel of the second radical is thrown
backward on to the first, e. g. 3 . S. Imperf. Act. p.
6'

instead of
7 U-
; Pass. '4for 1)'*;;
7
on the other hand
contractionddoes not take place, when the vowel of
S
the second radical is long, e. g. )ly;.
C

c. If the third radical is vowelless, contraction

CO./
does not take place, e. g. W
,P-
EEK 1. In the Jussive and Imperative (;p-)
(' '!) contracted forms occur, notwithstanding the
lyd
C*
 The weak verbs.

r$ 37.- The weak verbal stems are those which

have a ) or a ;S as first, second, or third radical.
%EX. For the convenience of the learner, 'the old
view is retained in the remarks following, viz, that
,
these radicals and 6 had originally in all cases
the value of consonants.
$ 38. The verbs pri?me :u~zd (cf. Table of
Paradigms g o . VIII) differ from the strong verb in
the following points:
a. I n the Imperfect and Imperativ I those verbs
prim= ), which have i (cf. 7):) with the second ra-
dical, reject the first radical, e. g. a; to bear, &ring
forth, Imperf. &-,Imper. &.
Some verbs i t is true, which have a in the Im-
~ e r f with
. the second radical, nevert,heless reject the
,; g;e. g.
Y ..
to lay, Imperf. AJ; likewise 5; to fall,
C
3; to give, &c. (see the dictionary).
;T b. in, is changed to 2- i; uuy to ,ii,l
e. g. Inf. IV from ej (prop.
/

S .o
= 'l&!;
& P
Imperf.
I V from #..to be wstehful (prop. U) ?
C.... =h?+.
Y
 5 39. THE VERBA U E D I Z ) AND 5. 39

c. I n the VIII. stem the first radical is assimilated

._B
to the following U, e. g. from to promise, W (
instead of /
W 2. . l .I 27
REM. The same rule"s are in force for the forma-
tion of nouns, e. g. from ;L\
5 .
Imperf. I L
... the noun
K+ is formed; from
& 3 to leuve, allow, Imperf. &
.; ,
the noun 2;;from a;the noun ;'(for
G;S;?)
time o f W t h .
5 39.
The J7erha m e d i ~ and 6 vocalise their,
second radical in the I., IV., VII., VIII. and X. stems
according to the following rules:
a. If the third radical has a vowel, there arises
d f r o m ; ~ e. g. JL;from j> (3. Perf. I )
.
2'-
.. /

(3. Perf. I)
n
. 2 ..
R
2.".
" ijb+ , G,+
3- "
k
.
G "'
.
(3. Imperf. I)
'r

(3. Imperf. Pass. I )

n 3-
/
n J R J'+H e - (3. Imperf. VII)
/ " A
'
,, -2: n
.a. 9
i~-+
.
.U.

(3. Imperf. VIII).

If however i n these cases the third radical is
vowelless, the C is shortened t o d ; only in the Perf. I.
;L and ;Lbecome ii and z" respectively (not a as in
40

uy, (so
of

C from

to
r

U, e.

i fromi:

.
L,

&+ instead of 4.i)

33-

2-

2-
3-
'
L

.
2.2
c

no inflectional affixes are

of 3:.
9

,, J$ ,,

0
5 Q9. TEE

nrp), e. g. 2. Perf. I & instead of &JP,".-

I : -
c-
c c
W

from +L, 2. Perf. I however

jCr,
; on ihe other hand according
&l instead of &.!PI,
to the above rule, 2. Perf. IV
3. Jussive Pass. I * ' from )l+(y),. &C.
REX. The Jussire of the verb

g. 3 j 2. Imper. I.

2,

3
....
.
&
S
F
med. (to
exist, fo be) can reject the ?z in those forms in which

b. If the third radical has a vowel there arises

;L e. g. J'+.
(Part. Pass. I).

c ,, &+,
S ,
9

If the third radical is vowell~ss,C is shortened

0 9

c. If the third radical has a vowel, there arises

e. g.+A,,.
3

G
.
L'
VEP.BA YEDIE

from &

$2
J
,

-
7
f r ~ m(3.~ Imperf.
~ . I)

jp-
J,+ F

o c
0
.

abed, e. g.

>

"'(3. Imperf. IV)

/

J,;
$ 9 0 1
0
7
r

7.L

) U
0.5

7
ARD

O . 0 '
G.

L&
6

(3. Iwperf. I)

(3. Perf. Pass. I)

(3. Perf. Pass. I)

(Part. Pass. I).

F

3
instead

U_

,
alongside
LZ
 5 40. THE VERCA T E E T I E ) ASD 6 41

If the third radical is vowelless the S is shortened

.. 3. Jussive I from
to i, e. g. 7'A &:;&; 2. Perf.
Pass. I from G;.
d. !L and
3.
become i n the Partic. Act. I
S S
=\I, e. g. g b instead of J2& (on Medda cf. 7).
e. The Infinitives of the IV. and X. forms receire
the fem. ending to compensate for the shortening,

.instead of JLI from JlSl.

S .
e. g. /

REX. The above rules a-c

are i n full force also
for the nominal derivatives from verbal stems medize
) and
S
e. g. Jbfrom
.#

S&, from
13
S.,
a,
S.
&L;
S... S ,
from k;w. Likewise according to C- arises from
5 S. S." 8 .
+ from S%;
y;
U .

from - ,
U!+.
5
40. I n those verbs, which have or 6 a s third
rndical, these half-consonants are in many cases
,
vocalised, or altogether rejected. Moreover the verbs
ultimze ) pass over into verbs ultimze in all
G
.
derived stems (e. g. 3. Perf. I1 i S f ) , also in the Partic.
Act. I, the Perf. and Imperf. Pass. I (&>L), likewise
in those verbs which have the form & (e. g.
( for ) The following rules are observed in
the case of these stems :
 a.
.alva and L;- U ~ C Lbecome ii (cf. 5 39 a) ;
>L
in the case of verbs ult. ,this ii is written with
\, e. g.
1
from &
;,,
rr

in the case of verbs ult. G

this ii, when i t is final, is written with 6 (cf. 5 2 d),
e. g. 4; (with suffix however generally iG):1 3.Im-
. O M r .U,
perf. Subj. : instead of The 3. fem. Sing.
Perf., which is shortened, forms an exception, e. g.
&g where
0

1
.r

from
//c
U.
0

.i' would have been ex-

pected (similarly also the 3. fern. Dual
i' ).
b. Apart from the verbs, which in the Perf. have
G,
and in the Imperf.
? / U ,
(cf. 5 l?), the verbs
,
ultimze take the vowel u on the second radical of
the Imperf. I, the verbs ultims 6 take the vowel
i in the Imperf. I. The language however does not
;
tolerate N U and yu as final syllables after a pre-
ceding vowel, but changes
"
;
L u s u into i e. g. ,pfor ,
7 7-
Ffrom
, r.
 In the Jussive and Imperative these long final
syllables are chsnged to short ones, e. g. Jussive
Imper. p!,?)!, G)!.
0 , ,c" U . D

pp,.p)-?;
, .
c. The endings ii (3. masc. Plu. Perf. cf. 32), T?ZU
(2. fern. Sing. Imperf.), and Ena (3. and 2. masc. Plu.
Imperf.), which begin with a vowel; as well as the
endings i and ii shortened from the two latter,
which are used for the Subjunctive, Jussive and
Imperative, are by rejection of the last radical added
directly to the second, when this has another vowel
than a ; if the second radical has a these suffixes
combine with i t to a diphthong, e. g. 3. P1. Perf. 1
'. v=
instead of 1 ':l
l',?, instead of l$; but 19) in-
stead of &,l ;
997 )
; 3. PI. Imperf.
. YO. .
instead of w)yj+
;
YYU.

2;;;
/

instead of
r 9 U, r u .
"* instead of
.
REN. The above rules hold good for the forma-
tion of the participles and the Infinitive, as also for
the formation and the inflection of nouns-the
following should be noted here:
a. After a vowelless' consonant , ,
8 8
and 6,
6
remain unchanged, e. g. )jJI nlgazwu,
'U 0,
,F gazwun,
S".

271arromyu, S") ramyun-,

5".
 b. After an a or i rowel (which is chiefly to
be considered) coalesces into its corresponding long

d tili
r (ay-~irni)from Q$!ri.
, ij.
vowel, e. g. d+ 1 (a"
r,
from
~~zurmnzt?)
7 G

(5")
. Y U.
+!I (cf. above rule b); cs7 iymz
P

becomes ZIZ, ;A ayun becomes 672; i n the case of

the latter, notwithstanding the shortness of the vowel,
is orthographically retained in writing, e. g. Part.
Act. I S., msin from
S - Ley nzu~u~nrnu~~
5 - 9
from
CS,Y '
I S . 7
so also 6& hiidan instead of y&-o.-Likewise
&Yi J r .
'asan; vithout the nunation
from yof is formed
GF.
C S
arises 5-. and from this - ac-
c. From G1 4

cording to the rule Rem. b, e. g. Inf. V after thk form

" 5.-
3.*.j: &
,g
SS,-
=
S
dji =
U C.
- ,,-'
S
maintains its
position, e. g. Part. pass: I from l*' after the form
'i 810, S
J?L:
, U ,

),yfor which )yis

7 0 .
on the
other hand in the same form becomes written
S-
U r, 7 0 - 2 .U

L57 g- Lsyy = &i".

d. The syllables ;and (similarly also ;and);
pass over into 8, 2. after a preceding 5, the half-vowel
being changed to Hamza, e. g. Inf. IV <L' t instead of
l=
" C"! (on Medda cf. $j 7 b); similarly without the
Ls

- z T instead
~
.
0

Nunation +%Y\; of
9 7 '
e. The inflectional endings tinu and T ? u of nouns
(cf. 5 53 a) are added to nouns ending in in and ulz
(Rem. b) in accordance with the rules given under c,
e. g. r$Plu. Kom.
S Y .+..$; on the
o
Gen. Acc.
// 6 - 9 ,UZ.J 5.9
Gen. ACC.*y
Wf,oy, S U

other hand igay Nom. P1.

cf. the Table of Paradigms No. XX.
5 41. Of doubly weak verbs the following are to
be chiefly considered:
a. Verba primce , and ultimz &, e. g. d,,
Imperf. according to 5 3s a and 40 b &I, Jussive &.,
Imper. properly U, instead of which k,is written.
r
.
F
b. The verb eIi to see, which in the Imperfect
elides the Hamza and throws back its vowel a on to
8 . 5 0 ,
the first radical, thus isi? yarb instead of yur'ci,
1. Piu.
.
0..
Imperat. ,or S),
U.
fem.
0 ,
Similarly
61; )
the IV. form, meaning to show, runs cSc instead of
i
E"€
el) 1, Imperf. instead of
,u s ,
Perf. Pass.
UJ

CS,,
7
instead of is3f,&c.
c. The verb to live, prop. G ;Imperf.
* .
(cf. Rem. to 5 2 d) after the analogy of verbs ult. 6,
46 5 42. THE YEF.DS A-.5 43. THE TERB OF PRAISE AND BLA3IE.

6 ./
or is1 after the analog7 of verbs mediz geminatz:
' .L.* .U' U
Perf. X or +!L and alongside these forms
also contracted &!(to be ashamed).
5 42. .
'G
there i s not (compounded of the nega-
tive 9 and the unused noun G.?
dl) is inflected as
follows:
Sing. Dual Plural
3. masc. ;
;i \,Z
3. fern. si .
oA~ E'

2. maso. a1 U' Y C

41
?X-!
S ' 0 -
2. fem. cr;iw.J

43. The verbs of praise and blame

. U
to be
."
good, . to be bad, which are seldom conjugated,
are of irregular form.
5 44. The so-called forms of admiration are
treated by the Arabs as special forms; they are pro-
perly 3. Perfects, and 2. Imperatives of the IV. stem,
which have received a peculiar meaning, e. g.
Go,' ,. , B
\&.j &a!G 1)rop. "hat has made Zaid excellent? or
05
&>.J+ 1 prop. make Zaid excellent! which mean,
U

how excellent is Zaidl-The verba medis , and 6

take the strong formation in these forms, e. g .
' oyl
//*S
hor easy this is!
45. The addition of pronominal suffixes ( 5 11b)
alters the form of the verbs only to a slight extent.
An 1, standing after ,L B, falls away, e. g.
the 2. fem. Sing. Perf. length ens its final vowel e. g.
0.' 0 9

er".The ending ,, ofithe 2. Plu. Perf: becomes

of ;;lu and the suffix
Y' 90..

dY e. g. 6.1
of the 1. Sing.; the ending Enu of the Imperf. some-
. 9 Y * / > Y

., .. 3. Plu.
"/

times becomes E, e. g. eLJ.xi+ or d&

Imperf. with the suffix of the 2. Sing. fem.
5 46. a.
When the object consisting of a personal
pronoun is to be placed before the verb for the sake
of emphasis, the nominal suffix added to the nominal
G G
sign of the accusative L" pl (ng,nk; L!
"p
with the suffix
of the 1. Sing. is i G 1 ) is used
"p
instead of the verbal
suffix immediately connected with the verb, e. g.
& JCIto thee we p m y .
.*B

b. The Arabic verb can have two suffixes connect-

ed mith it a t the same time; in this case the pronoun
of the first person precedes that of the second and
third, the pronoun of the second person precedes that
48 5 47. THE XOCS.

. 'E
of the third, e. g. ..._ he yuce it me; frequently
however instead of two suffises the periphrasis with
l: \
is used especially mhen Both suffixes are of the
9 "

- a+-.
,/z*
he let him mu,.ry her.
ihird person, e. g.
. 1)

T h e Noun.

The Arabic nouns (substantive anci ad-

47.
jective) are either primitive, e. g.
r, "
ox, &...foot, >;.-. ,
or derivative, i. e. derived either 1) from verbal stems,
or 2) from other nouns. To the former, the dever-
balia, the participles and infinitives, mentioned already
in 33 and 34, belong. Besides the participles there
are a number of verbal adjectives of which the follow-
ing forms are to be particularly noted:
5 .
a. The form & .,which occurs in a passive and
..h
r, S
in an active sense, e. g. kille4 LA+.& a witness,
S
one, who strives with unother, (in the sense of
S
Part. ~ c t 1111.
.
 47. THE S O D S . 49
5
REX. Nouns of the form &,. derived from
verbal stems med.
5,. 5
, and 6,moclify this form t o
5
3 .
,&, e. g. A-& lord instead of A'-L
, (from which in
, . S <

. mould arise).
the first place AA+
5 5 ?.
b. J,2,
e. g. +,&lying (frequently an intensive
form).
c. G{this form denotes colours and bodily de-
9. U = 0% 9 . '275
5
/

fects, e. g. yellom; for C5CC( (cf. 40

7
Rem. b) blilzd.
As intensive forms the following may be noted:
d. :G intensive form t o $1; and other
FJ G .

verbal adjectives, e. g. u f & l y i n y ; this form serves

a t the same time to denote nominu opificz~m,e. g.
CJ G.
]ti joiner.
9 o z
e. Very frequently the form &i is derived from
, adjectives in the sense of an elative (generally so
called because i t includes both comparative and
superlative), e. g. 3-
5 .
c
beautifi~l, elative
, . O S
more
5 *
beautiful, most beautiful; Y+O small, young, elative
I
smaller, ,younger, smalleiest, youngest; high,
elative &Thigher, highest. The datives, when they
stand as predicates, do not change their .form in
D
50 5 45. THE i<O>lIXA DEVEEEALIA.

C ,-E 'B
regard to gender and number (e. g. .,
a ~~
. 3 &l
1.
thou [fern.] urt 0207-e n3orthy of it): in the sense of
superlatives they are mostly determinate (S 56 cf. the
French "le plusr), in the sense of coml~arativesinde-
terminate, and are then construed with the preposition
& (in the sense of our utl~ann).
$ 45. Further to the nomina deverhalia the
following especial11 belong :
a. The nouns of place and time formed with the
prefix 2
FJ
nzu, e. g.
..
3.
the yluce
0.O-
for ~rriting, the
school;
r CiLo (from r;
after 5 39 Rem.) the spot
where one siands, place; G> (from 0 .U,
after $ 40
Rem. 13) the place for pustztrage, the pastzrre; also with
0_<a,
the fem. ending, e. g. x
ypluce for hzrriaZ.
REX. Nomina loci et temporis of the derived
stems have the form of the Participle Passive, e. g.
%
G
.,
b p (from the V. stem) the place, where the m'tztal
r, ,Y
mashing is performed; Lh;c from ,,L! I V to place) the
l'
spot where somethifzg is placed.
b. The nomina instrumenti, formed with the
prefix 5 , e. g. . .- milk-pail from to milk;

c -key from i3;;to open.

G .-U
 S,"
c. The nomina speciei after the form ~,
h ,
e. g.
S .'
&the
. . style and nlunrzer of nv-iting, the ~~ariting
(-the
haw d.")
49. To the denominatives the following classes
of nouns specially belong:
a. Those nouns which are derived from others by
0

by means of the ending 2, (corresponding to the

hebr. .
7-, a fern. a;-beside h 9 ) and following the
Arabic grammarians are called relative (adjectival)
2 "5
nouns, nouns of relation, e. g.& 1 Belotzging(re1ated)
S "B B B .
) SB
to the earth ( v ~ ,l),e a r t J ~ y ; ~belongiltg
h to &Syt.iu,
) r
a Syrir~n. On the addition of this ending the feminine
termination is rejected, e. g. g (from %) an in-
habitant of llIecca; certain changes sometimes occur
B ,,
in the vowels of the words, e. g. (5.
"jbun inhabitunt
of "lecIina from &go(
Medinu. By the addition of
the feminine ending (5 5 1a) to these nomina relativa,
S .
feminines, e. g. +,
L a Syrian woman, more frequently
. however abstract nouns are formed, e. g. v y U!, divi-
SZ .
nily from >g! divine from i?i!God; '&-..* l&
heuthen-
ti e

ism from &.G

.. heathenish from &;I - ignorant.
D*
 REX. Formations of nomina relativa with the
S ,,
ending are rare, e. g. from Ivemei2, uC;;-(for
" .G).
6

G?
b. Fomina deminutiva after the form are
5 ,.L
derired from triliteral nouns, e. g. &+C U Jittle s2ut.r
FJ c,
from U sluz:e. From quadriliteral nouns the form
6 F: S.:.-
&,- ..
L,? ' - 3
runs e.g. ".+?is U sn2ull scol.pio,t from U
S
L .r";
deminutive from &-G eoa~puaiu~z.Proper
" - 9
C
&
,-,

names aIso often have the deminutire form.

b ) The Gender of ATouws.

The Arabic has two genders, a mas-

0 .
culine and a feminine. A number of ~ ~ o r dare s
sometimes masculine and sometimes feminine (i. e.
their gender is common). Words, which denote
feminine beings, collectives, lands, towns, winds,
members of the body occurring in pairs &c. are without
a feminine ending essentially feminine: the gender is
always marked in the dictionary.
$ 51. The following terminations are added as
outward signs of the feminine :
 5 51. THE GESUEF. OF SOUSS. 53
S 9

a. most usually the ending %L utun (or %-L ccfu),

e. g. h .killing
~ fern. from $L;
G
yueelt from
S G .. 4.

&-
, , 8'*L
nzuiden from + (5 40 Rem. b) yozclh.
Many words are found only with the feminine ending,
G,.
e. E;. perk, garden, o~churd.
k.+
REX. a. There are however a number of mascu-
line nouns with this feminine ending, e. g. .-
7.0 .
Tulea (a masculine proper na.me). On the
e

Chalif,
other hand there are feminine nouns, which, because
they are essentially feminine, require no feminine
S
termination, e. g.
i-
SSbarren (of a woman).
FJ
REM.b. The feminine ending is sometimes
%A
added to nouns of general meaning to denote a par-
se. :
ticular, single instance (nomen unitatis), e. g. i+na
a piece of gold, u gold coin from d j gold; i~oLu
G .. ..
3' *.
&" -- S
.

dove from ,.La flight of doves. Abstract nouns of

singular oicurrence are likewise formed by the ending
5 .
g_,
5.0.
e. g. 63cC U sitting down once from L)Jrj' to seat
...
one'sself, sit.
b. The ending GA n, e. g. Gi?(fem. of
.a= -0'
S!
greater (elative according t o 47 e) ; remem-
brrmce;
0

G o (D
7
2 Rem.) world;
. i
&,l fem. 05
J!, first.
9 S 5
 c. The ending
- d'a, e. g. sl-*.- .from '"?
(adj. after S 47 c); a
-_l desert.
5
1
:
U,
~
1 Y

52. The Arabic has three numbers ; Singular,

Dual and Plural. There are two 'kinds of Plural, the
usual Plural proper called also Pl~cralissanus (whole
or perfect plural) or outer plural; and the collective
plural, called also inner, or broken plural (Plz~ralis
fiactrrs; cf. 5 62 fol.). At present only the former
comes under consideration.-Three cases are dist-
inguished; Nominative, Genitive, Accusative.
5 53. a. The following endings are used in the
formation of the Dual and Plural:
Dual Nom. -
3 I - (cf. 5 32)
,, Gen. and Acc. $L
,
(cf. U'.-)
Plural mas. Nom. &,L- (cf. 5 32)
n ,, Gen. and Acc. &
:'- (cf. u - ~ )
fem. Nom. &
:l (cf. ~ 5 - )
)) Gen. and Acc. .
wiz
The inflectional endings of the Sing. are rejected
before these endings; instead of the ij of the fern.
ending W is used before the Dual ending (also in the
 5 54. THE CASE ISTLECTIOS OF TKE SISGCLAP.. 55
5
Sing. before pronominal suffixes) e. g. +;-G,Dual
#

G G.
c;, .$ .
, .
b. Nany adjectives, as well as a number of
substantives, form their plural by affixing the ter-
minations just mentioned. Instances are found of
substantives with a fem. termination forming their
S-.
Plural with a mas. ending (e. g. year, Plu.
G,-),
9
still more frequently however substantives
without a fem. termination form their Plurals with a
5
fem. ending, e. g. &. condition, Plu. L~c;;
hearen, Plu. L
,;I;! (with transition of Hamza into
0 ,l,
Wiiw), also written ~f,+.,,,.
5 54. I n regard to the case inflection of the
Singular, a distinction must be made between the
so-called Nomina triptota, i. e. those declinable in
full and the so-called iI7omina diptota, i. e. those not
declinable in full. The latter never receive the nuna-
tion; and distinguish outwardly, when they are not
determined by the article or the addition of agenitive,
only two cases.
a,. The endings of the triptote noun are as follows:
in the Nom. Sing. 5 un
intheGen. ,in .
in the Acc. \Lan
 Instead of. I o n l j A is m i t t e n with the feu.
/I/ g
.
termination, e. g. hut &.?AA;
. also and
(cf. 5 3 h).
b. The endings of the diptote noun are:
in the Kom Sing. -L U,
in the Gen. and ACC.Sing. A U.
In the dictionary the triptote are distinguished
from the diptote nouns by the nunation being always
5 9 -
written over the former, e. g. &. a mutz; while this
19 / *E
is wanting x i t h the diptota, e. g. .!,,,o.,
5 5 5 . Whole classes of nouns are always dip-
tote, e. g.
a. All proper names which are feminine or have
the feminine ending, e. g. &L&, %(Egypt), as fem .
proper names: X&,
as the proper name of a man.
Besides these the greater number of those proper
names which are originally foreign to Arabic, e. g.
,&!;l Ahruhu?~~.
b. Many so-called broken plurals cf. 63, Nos.20,
22, 25, 26, 29, 30.
c. Adjectives of the form 47 c, e). (B
Y c!.
d. Adjectives of the form &h,which in the
fem. have the form ,&; e. g. ;
l.& angry, fem.
 e. Feminines formed with the endings or
-
61- (5 51 b, c). Cf. also the inner plurals 3 63,
K'os. 21, 23.
5 56. The fact of a noun's being determinate or
indeterminate affects the inflection of the Sing. and
of the fem. Plu. A noun is determinate:
SG.3
a. Essentially, as a proper name, e. g. d + s
7 / o E
Rluhammed ; ~
mu~~umnzudzin +uhrnudu
~ Ahmed.
l
b. By means of the article, e. g. wjr U horse,
FJ -- 4
1 9 *-C-

the horse. (Certain proper names also always have,

f

the article, e. g . ul-!l@riiu.)

c.
2
By the addition ofa following genitive (noun
or pronominal suffix), by which the nomen regens is
=7 ?a 7 . :
placed in the status constructus, e. g. &.
- ; 11 wi' the
7 Y /-

7zorse of the man, a, his horse.

ij
The inflectional endings of a noun determined by
the article (b) or by a following genitive (c), so far
as they do not agree with those of a n indeterminate
noun, are as follows:
Sing. Kom. L
, Gen. -
Acc. 2
Plu. fern. Nom. L
), ,, Gen. -
i. e. the nunation is in all cases rejected. All triptote
and diptote nouns receive these endings, when they
are determined by the article or by annexation, e. g.
' - 0 5 /."E ,. 5 0 .
U
Xom. a,-I Gen. Bcc. a,-;l but Som. a,-Yl, Gen.
/,*ox &. '5".
?,-Y\, Acc. J,-Y\.
5
57. Before a following genitive (noun or pro-
nominal suffix according to § 56 C) the endings of
c;'
the Dual ancl 2 of the Plural fall away, e. g.
-01.0 0 /

Dual Som. of l&, but ij;Jl the

=
3 .. !+c

two sluves of the TTizier.

7 3
Dual Gen. and Acc.
'0
&+.c,
U /
b u t y (S+
U * U /
wJ& O M C

,
I hove beuten the two sluves o f Omur (before a con-
nective Alif, e. g.
1-21379.C&, cf. $ 6 e).
Plu. Nom. of G&- sluughterer, executioner =

G+&*, but &Fi

. g&'
/ the execntione~s o f the
king (in such a case an Alif without effect on the
pronunciation is sometimes inserted after the 8 ;
.. cf. 5a e).
Plu. Gen. and Acc. &A',
...
. but * /
0e
.
-ll
3 "5,

I huve seen the executioners of the king.

For the inflection of nouns in in and un cf. 5 40
Rem. e.
 5 5s. THE PEOXOXIXAL SUFFIXES. 5 59. THE PLUG.U.S. 59

5s. On the forms of the suffixed pronouns cf.

5 11b-d. Before the suffixed pronoun of the 1.Sing. the
short inflectional endings of the stat. constr. of nouns
fall off, e.g. The suffix of the 1. Sing. takes
the form after final (7, L or ui, e. g. to the Nom.
Dual to 2, G.
($5 2 d ; 40 Rem. b); to
the Gen. and Acc. Plu. &h;
to
GC G .( 5 40 Rem. b),
&G; to the Gen. and ACC.Dual The final C
of the stat. constr. Plu. mas. is changed to 3 before
the affixed 2, e. g. 9Lcj
Y
becomes and this
with the suffix of the 1. Sing. >G
- (no longer t,o
be distinguished from the form of the Gen. and Acc.
Plu.). The same thing hal3pens with the ending azt
0.- 0 >
of stems ult. 6 (cf. Table XIX), e. g. becomes
U ,and
0..

L
this with the suffix (also no + O 7

longer to be distinguished from the form of the Gen.

and Acc.)
For the foregoing cf. the paradigms of nominal
inflection in Tables XVIII fol.
5 59. I n the case of substantival outer plurals,
which are formed from mas. or fern. nouns with
one short vowel (I. e.
scu,
S". so
M,h,J_tj und b,
S O ) F.".

'a;
&), the second radical frequently receives a vocalic
60 3s 60: 61. THE PLCCILS. THE T0CITIi.C.

addition, which either is similar to the rowel of the

first radical, or else is 6, e. g. +)! earfh PIU. .
S '5
u,~lL, 3 .E

S E
more seldom u,k)l,and
/ 3 05
ol.&j!more seldom uLjJI S U.

S - J 7 S / - 9
dcrrk:.)zess,Plu. ul+.& alongside uu and
G C ; ~ This
. S-U.
is often the case with the Plu. to the
S." -
form e. g. lii& (S 51 Rem.) CL single blo?v, thrust,
... some blows, fhrrtsis.
Plu. al.&
S

Before the word

GO. son (whicli is then 21 /

written \vithout the 1) a proper name lqses the nunation

.U< J Y Y
in the case mentioned G f 2, e. g. +.g! @
n2ztslimu-b~zu-lwalidi "Xluslim the son of al-Walid".
" , c Z S u ,
While 3Jj zuiduni-bnu bischrin (5 G e) means
"aid is the son of Bishr."
5 After the vocative particle
61. the noun
follows in the Nom., but without the nunation, e. g.
=" 5 Y. J
&S RIuhurnmed, &S? 0 i1Iuhnmmed. But if a n j
complement whatever (e. g. an object or a genitive)
is added to the noun standing in the vocative, the
person addressed is put in the accusative, e. g.
L.0 Y',_ &.a
a\A&:
* . /
6 0 Abdallah! ( 0 serva?ztof God!) ;
0

C
& / - .. 0 Banu Kinda! i. e. members of the
tribe Kinda (where &,: * cf. 5 57, is the form of the
 9%6 2 , 63. THE BBOKES PI.CI:.~I.S. 61

stat. coustr. from &).-After

. the vocative particle
$i
(before which also can stand) a determinate
, s e ,:B
Som . always follows, e, g. C t " ~ LpI
l! O ye people. g
G . The so-called broken plurals (Plz~rales
fr-crcti), called also inner plurals because they are
formed, not by affixed terminations, hut by internal
change, are really only collective forms. Hence the
language treats them as feminine Singulars and
S-,"--> S <U*
construes them accordingly, e. g. S i x ~ differ-
elzt gates, where U!,.!
s /"*
is the
2
inner
of
-
plural
S

G L"$'
(after the form S&\), the Partic. V is put in the
fem. Sing.-The inner plurals are inflected like the
singulars, the inflection of which has been discussed
in 54 fol.
5 6 3 . As a rule the inner plurals are placed in
the dictionary alongsicle the singular of the noun:
where this is not the case i t is to be assumed that
the word has no plural, or only an outer one. Some-
times to one and the same word there are several
plural forms, in certain cases each connected with
one of its various meanings. Particular forms of the
inner plural can as a rule be derived only from part-
icular forms of the singular. Here follows :a bare
general view of these forms, commencing with the
simplest.
62 5% 6 s . THE BEUhES P1.K-EILS.

(5
black; L+
1. G from
51 c), e. g.
D
-
S ,

' S o ,

.(for W)
7

'
... from
7
&l
oB

7.
from -(
-- o
(5 4i c ) and its fem. 6 l b . j
"5 S Y
red; 3 , from ay!
7
Y ."B

e b 5
white.
'
I

2.
5 _.
&e (rare) e. g. 2; S.'
from bei; circle.
5.
3. J.& from the Sing.
5 .c
U, e. g.
S S '
@ from id+
piece.
4. g mostly from the Sing. U,e. g. &
5.0 5 ,S S =8
S<'¶

from g& bor; yc t from &. 1 apeople; but also from

G,
C r

S .',A
e. g. 4 (for 6y.' after
S
5 40 Rem. b) from
Qf village.
S )Y
5. h from various forms of the Singular, e. g.
z f r o m L&
:. . a book.
6.
G,
&G, e. g.
," S, C

li;ei from . L 7
a twig; g-l
J
S. ;

P
from
$5

ef 5 ./. 5 5 ,*,
7. l i b especially from the Sing. &G, e. g.
from L p p e r f e c t ; but also from &,. e. g. :;L,
S
(forgi)vc*u
.. after
-.r

5 39 Rem.) from . lord (cf. 47 a

Rem.).
8. 'L; (rare), e. g. ga> from
5 - ape.
 63. THE CEOI~ES PLTELALS. 63

9. ~ from
S, Y
e. g. I&
ult. 6,
S ,Y S,.
(for k.tj
9

after 5 39 Bern.) from &G judge.

10. 3%
a very frequent plural form from various
5 - S '
Singulars, e. g. f& from
r, s .
c -
arrow. c*
.& ... (rare), e.g. F from ;L
11. J
. ass.
S , 7
12. -J
, avery frequent plural form from various
S ' 7 S* 9
Singulars, e. g. a,..+. from &+ n band o f soldiers;
3 and (with transition of u to i) .-.. (for S,&
after 5 40 Rem. c) from dI; weeping.
13. ZC;~(rare), e. g. I&) .- from is a stone. EJ /-

14.
0
. ' 9
rrfr"j (rare) e. g.
S. ,'
i i r o y from
8

p uncle.
W.

15. g from &L, e.g. from a female

cumel without a brand mark.
16. J& from LG,
e. g. " M f r o m
bjY
&?scribe.
5, o E S > U"
17. &l from various Singulars, e. g. &)l
from &.2 foot.
S, 0s S,
18. iikl from various Singulars, e. g. ell .
r, 5s E S .
from ..). cake o f h e a d ; +l from e-
. friend,
sii 5
loved one; %9;1 from ;G!Bpresident; h l ' f r o l u :$lB God.
 5 "E
19. j G l a very frequent Plural form from
~ a r i o u sSingulars, e. g. )li-r!from
S ."E

0 -
p rain; U Z

(without nunation) from z thing, )nutter.

20.
,. . o E
chiefly Born L+'.+,
6;
"
/

e. g.
-
c,Lc
"5
:! from
S - 2-i
.i
'0B t.

+:J= .. relufize; ../ from L rich.

. - - from c?l.+
21. &xi (rare), e. g. e~
0' c " S /

eau~ided.
-. -
22. r l k , e. g. it&
9
fromeL; poet.
9 S *

1
S S ,
23. &by
e. g.
- 0

;L, from &

4C
youth; / .-:
(instead of +
:;I: Q 39 Bern.) f r o m S i ; ,leiyhbour.
S 07 S , " Y
)
L"?
a

24. ,X&, e. g. from district; S

from
S
6 rider.
r'
25. &J>chiefly from and %G, e. g.
&C+from S,
thunder-bolt; from $?G
S 7 -
rider;
c*
(instead of 5 31, Rem. 2) from
>L(or E&)pecrrliar, noble, excellent.
7 -//

26. &Lrj from Singulars with a long vowel after

/

the second radical, e. g. ,-.>L3

7 - /
from . miracle;
7 c S 9 -
from
LI")r' bride.
27..
JL, e. g. )G from decision.
28. JG, e. g: ;G from desert;
L) 5

(instead of >l&& 5 2 d Rem.) from present, gift.

C-.
 tji. THE BROUS PLCR-US. 65
Y
29. (according to the formation of the noun
I ,
a i t h prefixed 1, or ? respectively also &G\, &l&,
&G)from quadriliteral nouns, e. g.
E S , Y O ~
C J G from
S - 0 7
,&.+ g~~tsshopper;- from &! fip of the fitzger;
Y
U from
6,

4-
experieace; h!/-
-r"from d+i" dufig-
S*,o'

heup; from -G ixterual.

30. ../ (according to the formation of the
noun a h o &l?, &bl, &Gl
Y
&L respect-
ively,) from quadriliteral nouns, which have a long
Y /,
vowel before the last radical, e. g. ?lT5 from
S Y <
L" IUOY;
c;' ?.J
C;+
' l,- - from iryl+ spy; j $ Y I from
e

&&I
5 o
crowa; cbr-1 from UL
8 U -

tuntizg, decZen-
'S -.J
sioa; >i'G from ),&id lot, fate.
5 c

.
31. ir;ULj (according to the formation of the
#E S '
noun also %CL!, &G;, &G respectively) from
quadriliteral nouns, e. g.
G, 5
2i1; "G
Y
from mighty
nio2, giant; kii.Ct from &L,,! bishop; g&sfrorn
a
5
scholar;
2
i ~ ~froml (gS 2 1U~I Z inhaBitaat of
,o,

Bagdurl.
564 a. The Plural forms Nos. 25-31 (only No. 28
differs slightly) fa11 under the class of collectives
E
formecl from nouns of more than three radicals : all
these take an d with the first, an G mith the second, an
i mith the third radical, and are (with the exception of
No. 31) diptota. Plurals of these forms, derived from
nouns ult. form an exception; in that they receire
the nunation i n the Kom. and Gen. though not in the
Aec., e. g. bom. and Gen. - ; 1 (after the form
L .- -1

40. 2 5 ) from female sluse; ACC.however c 1-1

L) 1
likewise the forms under Xos. 27 and 29, -e. g.
G (after the form &G No. 29 from & nzemlhig.
9
b. he forms 6 and 17-19 are as a rule used
only for objects less than 10 in number.
5 65. The following nouns (arranged here alpha-
betically) are irregular in their mode of inflection :
FJ 5 FJ 5 c,
a. U! father, I brother, ,,A father in lam; in the
'c
stat. constr. (as also before a suffix beginning mith
a consonant) take the forms :

FJ E €
The Dual of 1~ has the f ~ r r n - ~ f (i.
s f e. Bothparents),
the Plural has the form Ftif ( 5 63 No. 19). The Vac.
Sing. with suffis of the 1. Pers. Sing. &l
E
E
G, / . 'r

c,
L'.
B L , 7-
b. &J SOIL;outer Plu. Kom. (stat. constr.
Gen.-Acc. &. (stat. constr. e
L), r); Plu.
inner
1
-.us
g&{ after 63 No. 19.
B
I Brother, see under a ; inner Plu. after 5 6 3
No. 6
c "
S, 0
or No. 23 ;1$~.
5 "%B S //S
d. &f sistet; Plu. U!,+!.
e, y!orJia!
- 0 3 7 0 U
(alongside of r d ) ncua; Gen.
1
/ T c G

$4
is!.
/

ACC.
1
56.0
f. if wo~nun; Plu. from another stem --L
5
(5 63 No. 10),+,ii (5 63 No. G), or
- 0

(5 63
No. 23).
16 S ,,B ; z2
,
g. mother, Plu. ukfor ~ L d l .
B .U S 3
h. c)bf man, human heing, Plu. wljl, generally
.
;;.G.
i. &&. daughter, frequently also ((with con-
nective Alif), Plu. &L$
k. )L ..a dinar, gold-piece; inner Plu. after g 63
No. 30 ;A$;.
E*
 7
1. ,i (only in the stat. constr.) possessor of. . .;
Gen. &; Acc. 15 ; Dual Xom. ;l ; Plu. Nom.
'
B ? 11
for which ,J,l is generally used.
5..
m. ii;, year, Plu. Nom. U
-, - ? (or
. 7 7
;
Gen.-Acc. &.
n. )ys ,a)irrus,
36.
' Amr, mas. proper name. In
writing a i is added to this word in the Nom. and
7 - 7 (
Gen. (,$), to distinguish i t from 6 rlmarlr (dipt-
9 1
oton) 'Omar. Bcc. ficc Amr,
9 0 . c I.7
Gen.-Acc. .+c Omar.
<

1
9, 5 7
o. ,+
or 5i9 ntouth, in the stat. constr. generally
Nom. ,j, Gen. j,Acc. 5 ; inner Plu. (after 5 63
l S
No. 19) a ! p f .
- 0 s .
p. 3~j,l$ht, inner Plu. (from a stem & l,
after
63 NO. 27) jqj.
,

q. rG water, inner Plu. (after 5 63 No. 10)

5 -05
or (No. 19) a!?!.
r.
S
& hm4
9 ,E
inner Plu. (after 5 63 No. 17) L..:
5

from (cf. 40 Rem. c).

S

rY2 day, inner Plu. (after 8 63 No. 19)

0,
S.

from ;GC.
 66. THE C A R D E A L 5GYBEP.S.

The Numerals.

5
66. The cardinal numbers have the following
forms :
Mas. Fem.

d., 3@l (inflected as a Dual)

q - - --
(Z.(F&).)inflected
S,, us
4 X=l! n

+S

5
n
d
U, S,
limcj
E
E/

=
n

6 u-y % n

Su. S,o,
'7
c- k+w n

8
9~ ( ~ ..-~ ~ .n ~ ~ , g .

l0
l
9

F
S 0

5
g+
Q
- S,

.*
B
.
?>

without inflection
 11as. Fern.

l!3 9z5.( &g. O . without inflection

14. F
.
C r .,,US
1
;
? + 57 n n

lt5 &
c - <

/
- r o .
&g,
c.u/
+ .L.
,, n
, .= c _ 0 / 5
16 ,A+.,
ii&- m >l

17 p g
/
.y
.." c u r
r >> n
;$&G
- i) >>
r * ,- - U
l9 7-w
20 Q)+
. 9 :
like all tens inflected as an outer
n

Plu. mas.
,Y - 5 - 5 . .
21 d)*y
/ 3
0

r. .
djy.5,
Y U

Y r O ~
&=-L
c
C O

9 o r c d
30 40 c ) ~ J50
l ,r ; , , ~ , 60
,9 0 . r 9 0

XI0 2 f ? " 7 SO &$G, 90 ,

+ ;
100 (also written &, and always to be
pronounced so mi'atun, because the Alif does not
affect the pronunciation).
 5 67. THE CAZDIXAL XCXBERS. 71

&b+,
+
Y 0 -
600
.-
db
*
-, i:
700 g4 p,SO0 2-G
,
>
gb,
,
900
,
p. 0

s.,Jc ..- ,.
g.
9,
l000 a t ! , 2000 3000 3 31 ~ 3 %(where
S c z
zgT is an inner Plural after the form Jk1 63,
& B - - _ # _ E "-6 :
,
No. 19) &c. 11000 W1 &l, 100000 d!Dk,
l 000 000 4;
37.
8 The cardinal numbers are connected with
67.
the words, which denote the objects numbered, in the
following manner:
a. The numbers 3-10 (except when they are
placed after the noun in apposition, which is also
possible) take the word, which denotes the object
numbered, after them in the Gen. Plu.; the Feni. form
of these numeral substantives is used with nouns of
the Mas. gender, and the Mas. form with nouns of
the Fern. gender, e. g. & a% 9, *,
three sons

UG '.'F
+
cl four daughters.
b. The numbers from 11-99 take the word, which
denotes the object numbered, after them in t h e Acc.

* Often written G<.% S r

&c. also.
Sing., e. g.
_ Y r r

&% 30 men (in Germ. 30 Blitnn,

cf. in Eng. 30 horse for 30 horsemen).
c. The numbers from 100 upwards take the word,
which denotes the object numbered, after them in the
Gen. Sing., e. g.
+ 1
&l+ gji 400 men.
d. In compound numbers the mode of construction
depends on the last numeral. For the combinat,ion
of numerals the particle j is used,; the units and tens
a r e placed either before the hundreds, or after the
thousands and hundreds, e. g . 1885 years is either

"./
L
,7.- S o , , S
$LE_.
68 a. The ordinal numbers have for the most
part the form of the Part. Act. I, and are of the
following forms :
Mas. Fern. . Blas. Fern.
1. &{ first , 6. &C
S
 S 69, 7 0 . THE PARTICLES.

illas. Fem.
11
C
. .
G &
. - Q <

g
-
y &..a G without inflection
r

..or. .
12. r
. "(S. giLii;jrb I) ¶I

13. ..C

&JG
.
.
C D r
&G.
.
The cardinal numbers are used to express the
orclinals of the tens, &c.
b. Fractional numbers are generally expressed
by the form g, e. g. 3.a third.
Chapter 7:

The Particles.

5 69. The adverbs, prepositions, and conjunctions

cannot all be enumerated here; reference must be
made to the dictionary. The adverbial case in Arabic
is the Acc., e. g. &.& for long. The prepositions
also are for the m k t part accusatives in the stat.
constr., e. g. "9 above.
r O r

70. The following particles (alphabetically ar-

ranged) are connected inseparably with words:
5
a. I (3)interrogative particle, e. g. &l
.
.S
has he
killed?
 . (?). prep.
b. U = in, e.g. with pronominal suffises,
. /

1. in me, 2. mas. 4,
. 3. mas. U
H>
&c.
.: S,
c. & particle of asseveration, e. g. b y God,
b y Jove.
d. shortened from 5; particle, which gives
the Imperf. the meaning of a future, e. g. he
~uillkilI.
*
e. ij then, for, so, thus, a particle denoting a less
immediate (close) connection than 5,-used especially
before a verbal sentence, the subject of which is not
identical with that of the preceding sentence.
f. (3) instar, like, as.

g. a corroborative particle before verbs, esp.

= ,70//

in oaths, e. g. he will certainly kill; it is used

also before nouns.
h. i;! (i)
prep. and conj., before suffixes (except
with the 1. Pers. Sing. which is 3) J, e. g. d.
F

i. ;(7, 2) connective particle und; as an assever-

ative particle with the Gen., e. g. ATj
/
Go4
b y Jove.
8 71. In .regard to the combination of the pre-
positions and conjunctions with suffixes, besidq%hat
/l
was mentioned in 5 as, the following may d s o be
noted :
a. As in the case of nouns the final vowels are
rejected before the suffix of the 1. Sing., e. g.
clfter,with the suffix of the 1. sing. &&, but d%, &C.
b. The prepositions over and &
.agai~ut it
vocalise the final before suffixes (against 5 2 d), e.g.
.',.
with suffix of the 2. mas. U,&j;i!
-
7: ,i n 7, 3. a I&* 31
.. B
.-
G*
, -, , 1. , %L, JL(afterS5S)
. c. C)L
W

look, behold, really, truly, and

S 5
that, have
the forms:
with the suffix of the 2. Sing. mas. l and d??,
%
;
-
&L,
.Ad

n n n :t n 1. n $51
L- Or
 PART III.

The Tenses.
5 72. The Perfect (cf. 29) expresses a completed
action, the completion of which falls either i n the
past, the present, or the future; or is thought of as
falling in one of these periods. The Imperfect ex-
presses an incompleted action, which can likewise fall
in either of these three periods of time.
5 73 a. The Perfect is in the first place 'the
narrative tense, when an action completed in the past
is the subject of discussion ; as a rule i t is to be render-
ed by our Preterite, e. g.
-1
g:
a& there came Zuid.
b. The Perfect expresses that an action or a state
has continued from the beginning, and hence continues
'-*/,O.a Y,/o
still, e. g. ~~f !+l Zeumed men (always) dis-
ugree; 51;- God, he is (from eternity) exalted.
 73. THE PERFECT. 77

c. When the Perfect expresses an action com-

pleted in the present, it is t o be rendered by o u r
< ' ,'o-"€
Present tense, e. g. !&B &&S( I p r e s e n t you with
this (at this moment the action is completed).
d. The Perfect in oaths and wishes expresses, in
the meaning of the speaker, an action completecl in
3 -2 9/,-
the future, e. g. d\d God curse h i m ; also with
,204 e. g.
>A->.
d
.!
\
.Y- mccy God ~ z o thave vzercy
/)
u11on hinz.
e. When the particle occurs before the Per-
fect, it is to be rendered in the majority of instances
by our Perfect, e. g.
- 0.7 U ,
& we i u v e ~nentioned(often
with the meaning L L j ~now"),
st or we had nzentioaed.
Though the perfect mith can be used i n the sense-
mentioned under c.
f. When the verb &g (to be) occurs before the
Perfect (mith or without S),
it expresses for the

r odu?s '
./
most part our Pluperfect, e. g.GC? g; j?;G
//S

&h" G> 70.0

W;S. pI as i7.loses wus born,

Pharaoh had (just) comnzccnded to kill the young children.
REM.After instead of the above verbal sen-
tence (5 91), a c ~ & ~ o u nnominal
d sentence (5 92) can
7 " /U
follow, e. g. .. .>a l Jj'
//S 0 .
-Ij:
W
78 5 7.1. THE IJIPEXFECT.

g. On the Perfect after lit,

. and in conditional
sentences cf. $5 101, 102.
5 74.
The I?~zperfect(Indicative) is to be rendered
according to circumstances by our Present or our
Future, sometimes also by our Imperfect.
a. When the Future is to be particularlg ex-
' 0 .
pressed by the Arabic Imperfect, the adverb d7,
(ejzd), also shortened to L and then inseparable (cf.
> - a ,
5 70 d) is prefixed, e. g. &,+h
d
,
* D /
ye shall recog-
?tise (it) ; ,+
.,'2-
.k, ((1 41 b) we shuZ! show then,.

b. The Imperfect expresses an action, which

accompanies another and that a past action, or which
is future in regard to this other action, e. g.
7 €
they cuiae to their father, weepiizg (i. e.
* _ u s -5
while they were weeping, cf. 5 100 b); # f &l
he cunie to the spring, to &iiik.
c. The Latin Imperfect is expressecl by the com-
bination of &L%with the Imperfect (cf. (1 73 f, and
Rem.) ; we can sometimes render such a combination
by our uusedl, Uwas (were) wontn; e. g. j
C. */
L k jli
$
- ' he
C .

C s ( & S% ~j used to take each day three

P-) Cl..
druchnice.
 REM. The Imperfect is in this manner ;)laced in
05 9
direct dependence on another verb, e. g. L' 1 c;J G
0

-P 2
.//
I did not cease drifzking;
S e
.

he began ?ffi
9 w.9

to speak with the people.

75. The Subjunctive is used in dependent sen-
tences, in which the action is to be represented as
one expected, and dependent on the principal clause,
hence for the most p a r t as one which will possibly
occur only in the future. Hence this mood stands
frequently (though not always) after the conjunctions
b Z 5 Z c
2t 3 j l)
e

that7 Y I (from that sot, + until ihat, J

b
4, J, 251 in order that,
U /
so that; and always after
(from 3 >Y)
B
in order that not, e. g. j i,$ S&. he
r 9. -
came in order to visit m e ;
- .
,". -6 ,... S - -
2 f y! 4 he comnzunded
himn, that he should mile.-In like manner the Sub-
5
junctive stands after &j ((j! 3) it will not Be, that,
e. g. I shaN not send him.
9 76. The Jussive expresses a command, and is
used:
a. in positive commands, mostly connected with
the particle J, 2 9 0

. e. g. . .._he shall write.

REM.If 2
occurs before such a form, 3 loses its
*

vowel, e. g. J(+
OCj,, D-

. . . (then) he shok trust.

SO 77. THE P.~TICIPI.EB.

b. In all negative commencls, or prohibitions,

* ¶ / .
with the negative particle g, e. g. J.& 5j suy not, thou
shalt not scry.
c. Always after the negative particle g, as the
0 l".
negation of a completecl action, e. g. +2.+ he
h ~ aot
s struck (as the negation of 42).
d. In the protasis and apodosis of conditional
sentences, cf. 103.
5 77. As regards the use of the Purticiples the
following may be noted:
a. The Active Participle frequently expresses
(especially as the predicate of a nominal sentence,
S
5 92 a) our "on the point ofn,e. g.
-0-

D .
671an8
(on the poitzt of) coming to thee.
b. The Passive Participle frequently has the
BY
meaning of a gerundive, e.g. ,-F hoped
a,
for, o r to
be ho3ed for.
c. The Passive Participle in Arabic can also be
used impersonally, e. g.
X
- 4 ~ G?? it is written
5 7 0 , 5.-
zqon the stone, L
+ 3 D stone upon. mhich
7.
(it) is written;.also determined -.- &&ji
kei; 'd~
1
the stone upon which (it) is written.
 Chapter II.
The government of the Verb.
5 78. The acctisative is in general the case
dependent on the verbal idea. We distinguish here
the cases in which the accusative stands a as object,
p as predicate, y as nearer definition.
a 79. It is the province of the dictionary t o
point out, which verbs in Arabic have their object,
or objects connected directly, or by means of a pre-
position. Certain classes of verbs i n Arabic, as e. g.
the verbs of "comingyy,take the goal, to which the
A -*
action is directed, as a direct object, e. g. d ... 1 S&
he cume home. The following take two accusatives:
1) Causative forms of verbs, which i n the I. stem, are
simply transitive, e. g.
c I- "4
& to know; causat.
,/G/
X&

iirl?~ he taught him reading; 2) Verbs which express

a "fillingn or 'lgiving*, those likewise, which express
a "making for somethingn, a "considering to be some-
thingn and a 'lnamingn, as also many others, e. g.

fi *'3?~r &.- God made

G/' 9 flu" &
the earth. for a
carpet; -1 a;ul he called his son Muhammed.
a. AS in the latter cases the two objects
%M.
really stand in the relation of subject a&a predicate
F
to one another (cf. 5 92), a ~ e r bcan stand instead of
9

;t noun as the second (remoter) object, e. g.

ee
''31 *L . they foousd
was) giren buck to them.
their moaey (such as

REV.b. When a ~ e r b which

, governs two accu-
satires, is put in the passive, the second accusati~e
4 ~ . 7 3'0" / U )

remains as it was, e. g. l- +l C5f, his son wus

colled ~lI?tha?nmed.
SO. -4 so-called "absolute object1'can be acldecl
to eFery verb to strengthen or more nearly define
the rerbal iclea. This absolute or inner object (co-
gnate accusative) may be an infinitive, a nomen speciei
(5 48 c), or any other noun; e. g. by
B
'
-
he struck
8. ,/,a
a stroke (supply '[and what a stroke!") ; G..a* b +at
k he trained him with u good training = well (in
Arabic also with omission of the Infinitive);
,. - .-

F,
"5 -0
he strzick nze stroke which hurt me;
f ".. /
CL

L he wa7ked the wnlk of his g m n d f d h e r ,

a&
i. e. behaved like his grandfather.
p 5 Sl. The accusative stands as predicate:
a. with verbs, which express a "being somethingn
or a "becoming something"; of quite especial frequenc~
with the verb (rued. ,). This verb means either
 2 cf. T H E AUCEEETAL ACCCSATIYE. 53
S
1 ) fo he, in the sense of to exist, e. g. pj; s e t h e r e mus
,
(lired) u vizier, or 2 ) fo be something; in the latter case
it takes its predicate in the accusative, as do all
/ u s
verbs of similar meaning (e. g. 1 to be soniethi?rg
,. a s

[(lte; r
t to be son2ething early; to be or beconze
soilirthing ugoi)~;;l; to remain, to last; j l T
1 (especially
vith a negative) to cease to be; ;G to become something;
/

,
L. -
Inot to he sonlethfng), e. g.
9
,
95.0-
&lYl his
W..
wife was with child.
b. With the negative g, when tbis expresses a
general negation as the Arabs say. The accusative,
which is always undetermined after 3, then loses the
nunation, e. g. YIP 21
S
3 there is (absolutely) no
,.:g G I

God except Allah.

y 82. The accusative stands as nearer definition
in the following cases:
a. The Accusative is used in expressions of place
and time, e. g. $Q; / "
&
'
/
he looked 'right w d
d
l e f t ; &f
/

he journeyed a parasnng; S
&
- {,G
they came late in the evening; lib
'G, r

-
At&& +,l
1 /*- z-*o

aj
.Ghe remained firm on this (matter) during the con-
/
, -.
finunnce of his life.
b. The accusative (as a rule undetermined) is
very frequently used in verbal sentences (rarely in
F*
 si 83. THE I ~ O T L X S ~ I E SOF
T THE SOCX.

nominal sentences,
tion, e. g. - - c-=- - 90) to#espress
S -.,
a state or condi-
;L he jour~~etjed,fra-
++.
J
. , -
r!eliin~/Li the direction of illedina; @G 4 " -

4.
I haue ?,let '~im-,weeping (i. e. mhile he wept).
REX. In regard to the case denoting the state or
condition, i t must always be carefully noted to which
of the preceding nouns it refers: thus in the latter
instance it might refer to the pronominal subject
contained in
3
4..
-
c. The accusative of specification, also unde-
termined for the most part, expresses a nearer
definition, e. g. 6,- ,C-'
4 he streamed with (in regard
to) persyirutiotz; this accusative is frequently joined
to elatives (5 47e) of a somewhat general meaning, e. g.
6 - 5
g-& stro~igeras regards hardness = harder.
9
d. The accusative is used to express the cause or
the purpose of an action; in this case also it is for
the most part undetermined, e. g. they
fled for contardice.

Chapter Ill,
The government of the noun.
5 83. There can be added to anoun, a the article, P a
permutative (apposition), 7 a qualification, 6 a genitive.
 Sf. THE I)ETER.\IIXATIOS. 5 85. THE BPPOSITIOS. 85

a 5 84. A noun, when i t is preceded by the article,

is determined (5 56 b). This determination can
h o ~ e v e rbe stronger or weaker:
a. Certain words, which contain a temporal idea,
are very strongly determined, e. g. LCJ~
this hou~
= ?LOW, rrJj this day
r 0 *"'
today, ( ~ $ 3 5 ) cf. the collo-
=

quial "the day"). In this case the article has the

meaning of a demonstrative (cf. this use of the article
in Greek).
REV.Like the article the demonstrative pronouns
' > C ,
minate substantive, e. g. J, JI I& this man.
i
-
also are placed before, more seldom after, the deter-

b. The determination by the article often serves

merely to denote the genus (the generic use of the
article), e. g. U(
Oc. 9 0
2 h e is like an ass.
13 5 85.
Under apposition (i. e. when a permuta-
tive is added to a noun) the following cases have
especially to be mentioned:
a. A word denoting the material (cf. 5 94 d) can
9- G c
be added in apposition to a substantive, e. g. +l
> . F -
&&!! the goldeft idol, prop. the idol, the gold.
1,
b. The word JX totality either governs the noun,
or with a suffix referring to the noun stands i n
S6 86. THE Qf.<LlfICATlirS. 85. T H E GE31TI\-E.

.-c 2 1
apposition to the noun, e. g.
2 Y
JJ01- ,&?L~&I
allme^^ (where JXnaturally remains unchanged in.
gender and numberj.
y 5 86. B qualification can be:
S , , 5,-
a. An adjective, e. g. . CL haadsome
.g-=
m ; with the article S! .
[
!
+
L
5,-
b. .A preposition with its case, e. g. 2.
&$!c1 man(of) belo?tgingto the J~eigers(oflluhammed).
2 c. A relative sentence, see 5 99 b.
REY. When more than one qualification stands
~ i t ha noun they are as a rule asyndetically con-
nected (cf. $ 97), e. g. ,-' &; g--
&he is ilatelligeizt
und elopue?zt.
a $ S7. By the connection with a following
genitive the governing noun, which is put in the so-
called status constructus without the article, is de-
termined; e. g.
qmfy)
' the Zaptce of the horseniui~;
the suffixes also are determinate genitives, e. g.
)
his Zunce. When the dependent noun is indeterminate,
the governing noun generally remains indeterminate
also, e. g. Z-
&. a king's daughter. If this inde-
terminateness is t o be especially marked, the genitive
construction must be rejected, and the circumlocution
 SE
i;XJ c
7 -

.
with J used, e. g. -f a brother of yours. When an
infinitive stands in the place of a finite verb, the sub-
ject or object of the sentence is in the dependent case
7 U r

of nouns, i. e. in the genitive, e. g. &:

c .-)
& the killing
of Zuid i. e. the circu~nstancethat Zaid kills, or that
Zuid is killed. When the subject and object are
expressed by the infinitive, the object remains in the
accusative, e. g. 9
7"9-;l&
/
,'l J Y', - 9
the ci~cunistanca
hut he conti?zz~ullyindulged in the drinking of wine;
here too the circumlocution with J can be used, e. g.

& W7
the ckcunzsfai~cethat;
if the infinitive is to remain undetermined before an
w r fond of wine.

object (e. g. in cases like $ 82 d, &C.), the object can

follow with J only, e. g.
/
2
.
g*' 1 "-'1
-.,y y,
*

they refused becuuse they feared t i e wrath of Utmcln.

REM. This is the usage also if the participle is to
remain undetermined (cf. e. g. $5 81, 82 b), e. g. G
W -.- 3.
C O 0

,rL ,- 2 I have not ceased to be one lvho

loves Islam.
5 88.Of particular kinds of Genitives the follow-
ing may be noted here:
ss 35. THE C+LSIT1\7E-

a. A general idea can be inore nearly defined

1)~- a proper name following i t in the genitire, e. g.
/
.
U
-= 9 "E
the land of P7e))2en.
b. A number of words of more general meaning
frequently occur in connection xith a genitive, though
7
they are not necessarily determinecl by it, e. g. .h
possessor, JG .j U possessor o f ?no12ey, U rich ~ ~ U I L ;
B J
S 7
-G.- compa?tion, possessor, &S
C,
-G
. F
U sz??sible
- 3 c 7 , s
?nun; L&!(
&l the people of the world, = ~uorfdfy
c.
prople; +purt, 0 ,
e. g-
-/-to- 7
& o72e, some of the
leurned, 2 prop. change, then another thutz, e. g.
7,'.
a-
/ "
7
a+
C L-
&
L
- - / -

&$ L& there died the iiiizy t h e ~

there rzlieil after him unothet- f h u ~ he.
i
c. Instead of a genitive a finite verb can be placed
in dependence on certain words denoting ideas of time
and place, e.g. &G
- CO,
,$ on the day thut he was killed.
d. A peculiar kind of genitive relation is formed
further by the so-called Uimproper annexationn, by
which an adjective or participle is defined by a
following genitive, e.g. f!.,-*
a /U-= , ,, 5 7 -
a man hand-
some of cozlntenance. This construction is best render-
ed by a relative sentence, the subject of which is the
Torcl defining the governing idea, i. e. m ?2tuiz whose
cozinteltunce is hundsonte. I n such a case the govern-
ing word is not determined by the following genitive;
if it is to be determined i t receives the article (against
U

the rule 5 S$), e. g. 7 the moit

huitdsome of cozi~zfe?zaizce,i. e. whose cozc?tfenunce is
ha?~rlsonze.
89. The genitive cannot be separated from its
governing word, hence other words, e. g. adjectival
additions to the latter, are placed after the genitive,
e. g.&374" > O c
the spucioz~shouse of the king.
When a genitive according to our mode of expression
belongs to two substantives, i t is represented in Arabic
~ i t hthe latter substantive by a suffixed personal

eJ && the horsemu~z's

6r
7 70Y_
pronoun, e. g. -13
sword cnzd lance (prop. the sword of the horseman ancl
his Zul2ce).

Chapter IF-.
The simple sentence.
90. Sentences are either hTominul or PerBal sen-
tences. The verbal sentence always contains in the
'first place a finite verb ; such a verb with the pronoun
inherent in it already constitutes a verbal sentence
c 0.'
for itself (e. g. thou hust struck), by which the
/
beginning of an actirity (in a wider sense) is always
denoted. If besides a particular esponent of the
subject idea inherent in the verb is added, i t is placed
soc .,-
after the verb, e. g. 3J- ~ e * t rthere hcis s t ~ u c kZuid.
..) - /
On the other hand n nominal sentence consists of a
nominal subject and (in the simplest instances) a
2, * s a /
nominal predicate and denotes bare being, e.g.& &-
Zuid is rich.
5 91. I n regard to verbat se~zte~~ces,
the finite
verb does not always agree in gender and number
with the following subject. The following are the
chief points to be noted:
a. Before a subject in the Fem. Sing. (when i t
does not follow immediately), before outer Plurals,
Duals, &C., sometimes before inner Plurals, which
denote male beings, -
the verb stands for the most
0 ,U-= ,/OS

part in the Mas. Sing., e. g. &$+l +l there

upproached the idoluters.
.
b. Before broken Plurals, especially those which
do not denote male living beings, the verb stands in
, -- G 4 , " E
the Fern. Sing., e. g. G! there crt?ne upot~
 g 92. THE S O U I S A L SESTESCE. 91
-_.-,OS

-1
. there
hit~tthe misfortltnes (though also 5&1\
.b
spoke the Zear/zed).
REY. A subject unknown (or purposely unnamed)
is best translated by the word "onen (Germ. m m ~ ;
French on), and is in Arabic expressed as follows:
a. By the 3. Sing. Passive, e. g. % U jour~~ey
hns beell uttdertctke/z, one jotc~l~eyed.
b. By the 3. Plu. (or the 2. Sing.) Active, e. g.
(jioae soid (cf. %hey sayn, "people saya, uyou sayn).
c. By a subject (Participle), formed from the
S,,,,
same stem, added to the verb, e. g. 3;b Jb, or
9 -.U* r r

,G Jlj.there s$uke one.

In a X O I I L ~sentewce,
92. ~ ~ U ~ the subject is in
most instances determined, the predicate undeter-
mined. The predicate consists either of:
a. A simple noun, e. g. 21;
r
Zaid i s wise.
5.7 Y Y 6 .

b. A pre1)osition with its case, e. g.ili\JI j&+l

/
,
the matt is in the house.
c. A complete sentence, which can Be (a) a verbal
sentence, or (p) a nominal sentence; the whole sen-
, 50-
tence is then a compound one, e. g. (a) vr)y Luj
,
Zaid (he) is sick;
9"
+y,+$so.
Zaid, his fu;her is
/
92 5 33. THE sours-ir.SEZTESCE.

r, 7 , ,* &Sj' ,
s9f ~ f(tll/c?. is (tgcd (i. e.
Z U ; his
sick; (?)
Zuicl's fcrfher Sc.).
53. On the connection between subject and
predicate in a nominal sentence the following should
be noted:
a. The pronoun of the 3. person is as a rule
(though not a l a a ~ s )inserted between the subject and
the predicate, when both are determinate, e. g.
'$73 &q
D

God is the Lirf~zqone (sometimes this

L
pronoun is used simply to emphasize the subjectj.
b. I n negative and interrogative sentences the
predicate precedes the subject, e. g. *Ja.1
0 . .-E
muhere is
Zuid? 2
a-
& $ L ye hnac no heil,er at nlZ (in which
example +. (sontething, (ir?ythhg, o f ) , strengthening
the negative idea, has been added to the subject 3j).
In like manner a predicate, consisting of a preposition
with its case, precedes the subject, -when the latter is
indeterminate, and not more nearly defined by a
05,~s .-e
qualificative, e. g. U / n{ td! & in the hoztse is c!
J , ,
?vonla?L.
c. If the subject of a nominal sentence is a de-
monstrative pronoun, i t agrees in gender with the
following predicate, e. g. g2i;a&- - this is cr female
slcrre.
 S 94. SUBJECT AND PBEUICATE. 33

d. The predicate of 1
; not (often also of $1
gg 42; 81) is introduced by U, e. g. 9 - l& G
,
6 <

this is lzoi U king.

$j 94. In the relationship of subject and predicate
the Arab places:
a. A thing and its measure, e. g.
GIHi
1-
the colzl~nlzis 30 cubits (high).
b. A thing and its like, e. g. W!
, , , " ) 0

6
1
70.0d

the sale is the likeness of (like) zlsury;xalso with d

(S 70 f.), which can likewise stand in every case.
" 9 U I O 9 7

c. A thing and its parts, e. g. y4J1 le)&

,-',
,us
the kings of the Persie~uore (consist
of) four classes.
Boa
d. A thing and its material $6eLZ)f 7

p a r t of the toes
U NUS (ofj bon, und o
p a r t of them (of) clay.
95. a. A nominal sentence always follows
G"
(m?)look and that (cf. 71 C), likewise the com-
pound particles 3 (%g) still, hotueuer, %
; us ih
ffi z-
because, and other combinations, as well as 3
perhaps; the subject of this nominal sentence being
placed in the accusative, e. g. ,,+
S

.
I&rj
"0.
Ul
c
see
94 8 95. THE PAETlCLES ' I S ~ V A
AND '.i.\-.Yd.

(verilx) Zclicl is ymerotts. In a nominal sentence of

this kind the predicate, when i t consists of a preposi-
tion with its case (cf. $5 92b; 93 b), precedes the subject,
which is in the accusative, e. g. .. j
in the citadel is (I prison.
REX. The corroborative particle (S 70 g) is .
often prefixed to the predicate after a preceding
35
e. g. JYG
6
G&! 9%
I reriiy out. futher i s fn error,
or to the subject, e. g.
. O C

/
C '

+ rerfJy fherei7t
is ex(~lp7~.
b. After the above named particles the pronoun
of the 3. Sing. mas. as the so-called pronoun of the
fact, is sometimes used for the subject; the predicate
then consists of a complete sentence (cf. 92 c), e. g.

nurrufed, fhut i&h<maed had four female s k ~ e s .

-
REK. introduces a fresh independent sentence,
-
while a sentence which begins
a part of another sentence; e. g.
. & dost thou izot k m sat
~ ~God is
/*'p s'.p
polverfitl a6orte all? In this instance the sentence be-
=d
ginning with is the object.
 5 96. DEPESDEXT SESTEXCES. 95

5 96. As has been a l r e a d ~remarlied a dependent

sentence forms an integral part of the principal sen-.
'E /'/
tence. Thus for instance in the sentence j l
, .-a-
!&so &, the verbal sentence introduced by & l is
the subject of the verbal sentence consisting of
-
m-. U.

Such dependent sentences also with G and the finite

verb are of frequent occurrence, f o according
~ to the
a
view of the Arabs this combination (like j l with the
finite verb) takes the place of an infinitive, e. g.
+ 6, /

W,&
0- - (G &) 90'

=
+ U ,

l+j +,& &:

C 0 -

1 ?z.ondrr uf this fhaf (at the circumstance, that) fhmr

lzust s f ~ u c kZaid.
97. If in a nominal sentence several predicates
stand instead of one, these are for the most part
S
as)-ndetically connected, e. g. 'r*
/.; .-. 3:I ufn.
uftelztive (cntd) well-kformed. This is the case with
tile predicates of the verb (which frequently
occurs as the substantive verb), and the verbs similar
to it (its "sistersn as they are called, cf. 5 Sl), e. g.
++f
U/"-. -'
Jk!
.iiLul
----0 C"- G
/

-Gj
S
-..
-
the ki7zgdoom will in the 7usf time be
*
~,ii.xed (ccnd) foi-/L' B y i t i f e r ~ u disse?~siojls,
l (und) Be olze
cif rvhich c/ part ~uillBe strong, c l ~ ~Udpart weak.
5
98. After the exceptive particle that which /

is excepted stands in the accusative, when a positive

*U/ = G C ,
sentence precedes, e. g. 1% YL &W\ S& there came
the people, except Zcrid; when a negative sentence
precedes that which is excepted stands more rarely
in the accusative, but generally in the same case as
"
that word which it limits, e. g. 33- l i f
B L,

b
'. e; ' r
'S? G
there cunie 120t fhe people, except Zc/id; &.L > ' "" G
3
= G
,U

9 -3
511e I have pussed no one, except Zaid;
Y
wyU/

ru,

!-.Yl \L! 0
I have sfrtlck no one Buf ' ~ n t r .

Compound sentences.

99. Relutive sentetices are divided into those

which are not added t o a noun, and those which are
qualificatives of a noun (cf. 5 86 c).
a. Relative sentences not dependent on a noun
are introduced by the inflected and always determin-
ate word 6$f (cf. 5 13 a) the one, who; that, which,
&c. ; or by the uninflected pronoun (which is
 ,$ 99. RELATITE SESTESCES. 97

sometimes determinate ancl sometimes indeterminate)

= the o71e, who; o??e,?cJ~o;those, who; szcch, cts and G
h&!,F&&!!
C,
(L thing) ~ ~ J t i c Ex.
= thut, t~)l?ich; h. : * .
Eo-u-c , c E
&b.+!!
. "&
v&! r' those, who despise our ?.eveZrtlio?t
those frill Be the people on the left hand (&$l as the
7 7 055
subject stands here in the Nom.); I!!;
.
&...,,h (the devil said) sBuN I flrN domr Before one,
thou hust nictde of clay? (&
~z~horn stands here in the
genitive); +&.
F G F . '.
they suy
zuitlz their mozlfhs a fhitly which is aoi 732 tAeir heirrfs
(L stands here in the accusative).
b. A relative sentence is added to a substantive
G,
by nleans of only when the principal noun,
k.-
with which e j J \ has to agree in gender and number,
is determinate, e. g. L
.; . . &.+l
Gut 5 5 . 7 G 70.-
Istruck
the 711utz who ccme. The reason of this is, because
C.
GUIoriginally is not a relatiiie in our sense but a
demonstrative, and as such always determinate-the
above sentence means really, Isirzrck this nun here, he
ccme. Hence on the other hand a relative sentence is
added without rS$i
when the principle noun is in-
determinate, e. g. 5% &.
' 7 , 7
I struck o man,
(3
 ciulte (where "n-110"is unespressed in Arabic: prop.
K ~ I ,

"a man? he came:').

REV, I t is only n-hen the principal noun is merelx
-
d
,

genericall? determinate (cf. 5 S4 b) that is

wanting, e. g. 5 ~ &; F . ci;e oi( (the)

c. The relative sentence: which is l ~ r o p e r lon11

~
a nonlinal or -verbal sentence added to the principal
word, contains as a rule a pronoun referring to that
5 , , ," -4 Y , ; .

word, e. g. &59 1 I\ tlje i t l m t n.hosr f ( ~ t l / ~ ~

7

(in this example theFJ pronoun is

mas cctllec? Xzrl~cre/~~~ecl
contained in the verb); S'..) ki j& &.j .;t man,
nlto is ccrlIecI Zoicl (prop. of whom is said (lie is)
Zaid).
REY. I n relative sentences, which consist of a
nominal sentence, a change is sometimes found, in that
the predicate of the relative sentence is coordinated
with the word qualified; in such a case the subject of
the relative sentence however remains in the nomi-
9 -05 6, .L7 G Y 'CI
native, e. g. L&
.!,! 1 W ~ -f -3; ) 1 I fo~ri,d W\
iuti-
.
?~2(17s, of n'llich tIke sf~ecies ruere aarious = LplSI
9 /U*

E- /
# 1lSf). sEN.rr:ssEs r>ESOTIXG .\ STATE. 8 l i f l . TElIPOR.\L RESTESCES. 99

5
100. Sejzfences d e n o t i ) ? ~a sfute or condition
form a special class of dependent sentences. d sen-
tence denoting a state (Zustandssatz) consists of:
a. -1nominal sentence introduced by the particle
-
3'
the subject of which has been already mentioned
hut can also be a fresh one *&2 t -5. 2;u j G
O
0 '

she diecl, while she wrcs reficr?zi?zg to JIecca; &G

5 Y7u4 SO.
-
/

/Aj.p du. f 9 ..) Zaid died, while his son was stilE young;
' O. .,
mith a compound nominal sentence
-&..!I
(I -a
he journeyed,
- 1 3
taking iTZedina crs his goal.
)

b. Often also a verbal sentence; in this the Im-

perfect stands either alone, or with a preceding G-;
3
mhen i t is a negative sentence either with 3 or G*,
3
or in the Jussive with $ (as the negative of the Per-
fect): or the Perfect stands with G.; or &$, when
.- *: .
it is negatived, with G;, e. g. .
rZ ctl
-4
cume (as he was) Zaughing;
5 . 7

rXk .J 27 JG
...H
$7 . * ..- ;
9 !+-.G-
F hp
( ~ a c h & i a s ) said: hom shaZZ I have a son as my wife is
&..=;
barren and I have reachecl sztch u grecrt age.
f3 101. In ten~poraZsentences, formed by the particle
mhen, the perfect stands in the protasis in
G*.
 / . -
+r) I j !
C

the scnsc of our present or future, c. g.

7 7 * -
-.- .,=c-= ,'C

;;irj d>i\
#

when I',icX. does tilil,g i / s

/
L also in the meaning
dif/jct(I/ics((recrtsiI!/ s~r~)12nu~~terl.
of s o long as.' talies the perfect after it, e. g. 2;G
2G
/ C
0s /ring us I f i t q ~ ,I cInl thmz~-fu~.
2 102. In sentences containing a conditional idea,
thus after the particles if, if unyone, if
n/,y,liil?g, - a
G i f t z q e ~oi~ythiirg, &how, h o ~
cae,; the Perfect stands in the protasis
~che., &C..

in the sense of the present or future: ancl in the

apodosis also, e. k.fiz . 2 P1 if thou does(
/hat, thou wilt perish; j~ & if one seeks, one
fin (IS.
REX.If the Perfect is to retain its meaning in the
protasis, the verb *&is inserted after
Li C * C ,Y g,,, . /
&L, e.g.
d&: & +,
C.
2-
,.a r;,C( i f his j r l ~ k e f has
c

been tor12 in fro~zt, she hns spoken the truth.

103. a. After these same particles the Jussive
stands in the protasis and apodosis, e. g. br""' U C
2l
' 2, ' C /

F .. If ye endure puliently, God mill he@ you.

b. The Jussive stands likewise in the apodosis to
nti imperative protasis, which expresses the meaning
of a conditional, e. g. G & 22"" c o ~ i -
I L W ~ C C ~(ifI ~ thou livest contentedly), fhelz thort will be
f! kAg.
c. The Perfect can also stand in the apoiiosis to
a protasis which has the jussive, e.g.
*
,U 0

F G!
0.

if ihou endttrest prctie?ttZy, thoa ?uiZf Be ~ ~ i c t o ~ i oIf? ~ ~ .

the sentences are negative, $
stancls with the jussive,
I"%
y
0 -0,

e. g. e )! 3
G i f he does not go away, I
nrn not confe~zfed.
REX. Sometimes the apodosis of a conditional
c ' ,*
sentence is omitted, e. g. !As &l( if fhis is so;
supply, if is meW.
9 104. Before the apodosis of a conditional sen-
tence the particle 6 is used:
a. when the apodosis is a nominal sentence, e.g.
S
bi G 2;;L c
i f he prove himself obsfitzufe, then
woe to him; likewise before sentences with and be-
fore interrogative sentences.
b. when the apodosis is a verbal sentence, the
Perfect. of which should keep the meaning of the
perfect (cf. 5 102 Rem.), especially when i$ is
"5
21.
U 9.
used (cf. 5 73 e), e. g. &jj !,U!&i;
I+!
9

p.
qJ.r , 3 !U=,:.~
P/ C f l i f t h e y beconle .Ihuli)~gs, they
/lace conztl to t72e right pnfh, rind if t7ley turn crmcry, (1111!/
/he brilzging of t7ze a~essugeis laid 2q)011 thee.
c. when the apodosis is a verbal sentence, which
C U .
contains an imperfect with one of the particles G,,,,,,,
/ C .

U", 0 - 1-7 or which expresses

"*
a colurnancl or wish, e. g.
0 9

sgl - ij &do us1 if thou fi,idest / h p e i f

y- * ?
4

4 <

~ t m o I,-ec,lile,
n ~ then nlilk into /heir pail.
m - G & z 6 & < & 4
Aa*
 P a s s i r i I rerbi s a u i

Iinpevfecf~c~)~
Pel-fec-
Persona
Sume-
m, txrn F
Subjunc-
.
Indicatiyus tiiYu, Jussix-US
-- -- ---
3. masc sing. G L..

3. fern. &i a
? 2 0 7 / / 0 7

i*:..:
x.u
./
2. masc. - . a 6 ?

&
..$
'..L?

.. . ...
.C?

2. fern. , +

3.masc. dual. G i;(

. .. a i i
3. fern. ,,
..Of
\.
hE .L7

3. masc. plur. !G +@

3. fern. / ;
I
&, - & ! $ l $

1 ! 7-09 7 -U 7

2. masc. ,
-
3 +:+i+
1 I
O r 0 7 O r 0 7 *.L7
2. fern. / ,, X
Paradigmata.
6 Paradigmata.
 l l
l V1 I
i v11 VIII /
l
IS '
l
X

/,
... -. - ..

Perfecturn
- .-

Activi
. .
./,,
. . - ..

1 z r . 0

&S! ; J~G! &L ~ 1

8
3,
&+.+
7 .U/
1 I
6.0,

1
I,*

ilnperfectum ,,
imperativus ,, .A; .,
;&
0 .
I i$!
G
8

l
1
0

A....
,U-. 1
li
U,

'd
" - U ,
Pnrticipium ,, &ji8 ,
i
l ,U , u t g:
0Q

Perfecturn Passivi / 3
5
1 >.-UrU,
Imperfecturn

Participium
,,
,,
11 ~~~.
0

Jx2x;r
9

r, i D 1 s . o ' ,

Infinitivus J@! '

1
~i?;! Jl~ii~~l
I I !
 TABULA V.
Paradigm flexionis
-4ctivi I verbi mediae gerviuatae

Imperfectztnh
Persona
Sume- Perfec-
rus tu,iz P
Indica- Subjunc-
- Impet-c:tivus
tirus tivus JUSS~YUS

3. masc. sing. F ?+\G,J .

'5 =.
+
,; $
=
S):
U ' _

E=. J
,
+ .... .... \a
Ci
.L),
"ij ,+
o* (S
3. fern. .A)
l,.. 1.-
...
, +
+ ,
-0.- C C 6. 0 . S ; G 5
2. masc.
V )z-(,~j;
3.5 1 5
X X

%fern. :, ?j;J; * I .

~ &p
L.

62
.
(G)F!
..
1. ,, Y .0
")ij
.
9'
J E C S
)p(z%!)!
"'E = E

3. mast. dual. t
.G C
t . .
G , 8
C. 1
; !+ 1
- 3. fern. ' ,,
I .
.C,.
by;ulp IF
, 5 Ci r 5. I

. 1
91
4. , :I

3 '

4. masc.
 Paradigmata.

TABULA VI.
Paradig~l~a flexionis
Passivi I verbi mecliae geminatae

I)tzperfectz~m
Persona
Nume- Perfec-
tz'')t k d i c a t i - , subjun;-
--
Jussivus
TUS tivus
--- -pp -- -
5 Y 6. 7

3. masc. sing.
S) / 5.7 5.) U,OY

S. fern. I7 etc.
1
id
Or - J

2 . mast.

4. fern. :,
1. 7 u d l
l5 ,

S. masc. dual.
5.7 i. - 7
S.fem. :,
i. ,Y

2. 7

,U
:3. fern.
2 -7

2. fern.

1. n
 TXBCLA T-III.
Paradiglna flexionis verhoru~n
primae radicalis e t 6
T-erbi pr. 3 T-erbi pr. )
, Terbi pr.
Imperf.i Imperf. a Verbi 11r. 2 sani
LS
-
., . - ..
I. ~ e r f Act. & ~ j t3j C"'
F

F.
9 .L/ ' L'

Im~erf. ,, ) .W
Imperat,. . Jt? 2 (h!,. L
p+) F.'.
'C
I

Imperf. Pass. &,S+

Y 7 - 7
:cw$
7 . 9 .
7
J'-",'.
'
9
' S c - .'5 S . S L.
Infinit. idl?, ~ 3 ,3r3
,
c-; .-,
< 'Z
IT. Perf. ~ct.
1 9,I ?L; ! --"4
Imperf. . ' 7 : 9 Y

9
' 7
,F%+
'
r,
7

Partic. , &,a I
, p
9
9

F.Y
9

1 5 .
f i t . \,L; l. 1 &l&?!/ 'C G. I, 9 ..~ t
I
. l

i&.1
. C 1
111.~ e r f . ~ c t . !
I
g;
Impkrf.

Perf.
,
Pass. Gji) &@l S7
/

@Ad 1
_
+!
6,

X.Perf. Act.
., j ! , D - O , ..U-L

&&+!l &a,&,,!
S 0 i s -
Infinit. 1 JL+! &ILL&!
 TABCL.\ 13.
Pt~radignia flexionis
Activi I verbi mediae radicalis .
I~iiperfecf
zl?~a
Sunle- Perfec- I,,tyeun-
Persona firz~s
tzt''L '~ndicati- Subjunc-
tivus Jnssivus
TUS
- -

3. masc. sing.
----P-

..
--

Jk
-

J+
7

J&
-- -

.. . .7 r Y _ . 7,

3. masc. dual. I y,j;t y-/ "

. ,. '. lii.:-
3. masc. plur. \
7
wgps7

, 7r
pi
3. fern. ,, ; 0 7 L 7
;
'

2. masc., ,
B. fern. !
 Paradigmata.

TABUL-4 X.
Paradigma flexionis
Actiri I verbi mediae radicalis G

Impet-fectuvn
Xume- P e ~ f e c - Impera-
Persona ,,, ffc7" &dicati- ~ubii~nc- tirtcs
VLIS
tims Jussivus ,
- - - - I

2. masc. ,, u
r o 1
~
Y
,
- + #

p,
0 .

3. masc. dual. L ! , 1
- l+,
/
C /
- l
!

l
3. fen. l l p&+l*
/ - r

1
, G .1- -
,
1,

. - l

2. 11 I' .
l
,
l * p?
J r ' Y . l

t,J+y.? ! I)ju7-i.
" .l
/
,,
0 .

ji7" ' &y%

Y C i t Y -. - i
2. ,asc. 8 ! pp j &)p+, \,j++ 1 !)p
2."". d~F
i j y o 0 L - 0 -1
n
i ~ I
~ 5 &+l!
1. 1 L:>l y c 0 -
ye; )lj
 TBBULA XI.
Paradigms flexionis
Passivi I yesbi mediae radicalis , vel 6

bzperfect u m
Xume- Pe~feo
Persona rus flb1)L '
Subjunc-
Indicativns Jussivus

:3. rnasc. sing.

3 . . ::

L). niasc. !,
2. fern. :,
1. . n

S. rnasc. dual.

3-fern. ;,
)
A.

3. masc. plur.

3. fern.

2 , masc. :,
2,i'em.

1.
 Paradigmata.

TdBULh XIII.
Paradigms flexionis
Actiri I rerbi dtiruae (&) ,
Itnperfecf ~cnz
Sume- Perfee- - - - -- -- Inyeru- -

Persona NS Indica- Subjunc-

jussivus tirtts
tirus tirus
-.
3. masc. sing. ?c ;
;G
Y$- ,YL.
,;A? +
; Y',

3. fern. ?,
L

/
..-
'/
Y i * - ? L r

'/ F&
..

*.aF F
-G*. >i, . > L r ) L )
2. masc. ?. -i ,;g
37 '/

~ / r "syl
0 . L 7
C r y Q. L -
2. fern. ~,j= .<.AS
-4
*
.
1. ,> X W
Y .y
; "7
;y i
Y oE. Y c=

j61
!,m
,,G, .YG. -9:.
3. masc. dual. I , t
3.fern. ,! 146
* .. y.r;z
l
; ) ,
!..'?E- S
;,!

2. ,
-90.-
1
l_.,Yr;
, ; , 7 Y

',F!,PI
' r J

3. masc. ' ~ l u r .
<.b

0 , .
,. I > O r ,

>Or l
7 0 .

lJj+ ?, .I
7 c -
Y 0.

Y P,
p .
, '
r

3. fem. y , j
,9
! r fos'
2. masc. , : ,+>,F ;
.'C.<' 0 -

JJ-
7 ? \

2. fern.
i : -. , o -
,: : d>,y
- u-
U,y y:5
~ yy t i
1. >> , ?;L; , Y'!, ,to,
>,m r"
> G .
 Actisi I verbi ultimae 6'(&)
-
L ,
--
Sume- Peyfec- . - I11~11era-
P e r s o ~ ~ a rlls fz[912 Indica- Subjunc-
Jussivus tiz'?cs
tivuc: tivus
I

is"; r1 G).!c"
U * r O., .
U
3. masc. sing. *
CJ+

". -
l
2. masc. l ,
:
"9 /
O r . . U.

3
0
. l
9

3. masc. ; dual.

3. fern. j :, '

I
2. I
I n '

3. masc. plur.,

3. fern. l, ,, :
,

I
2. h1ttsc.j ?, l,
l
 Paradiprna flexionis

L .
- --
Sulne- Perfec- I)~~j)evr~-
Pe~.:c~ca tlc,ll Indica- Subjunc- ~~~~i~~~ tivtts
I'ilZ
tivus rivus

3. fern. v
I
-. z G-j ql.+.ay
<'< L < L ;
,..Q7- GL2 G;!
" I
3. S . 1 ,
Y .
,
, i , L r

./
\p;'\d+
L,Lr

1
L,',

J
 TABZTLA SS'I.
Paradigms flesionis
P a s s i ~ Ii verbi nltimae ye1 ,
L ,
-
Sunie- .Prl;Tec- -

Perbona tllltl Indica- Subjunc-

1'11s
t i t us tivus Jussivus

:3. masc.

3. fern.

2. luasc.

2. fern.

1.

3 . masc.

3. fern.

2.

3. masc.

3. Tem.

Bb*
Paradigmata. 21
 TABCLA S\-111.
Paradigms flexionis notrliilis
n) generis masculini

detei~ninariin
illdererminati d e t e d n a r i
cunl arricuio statu colistructo
Sing. Sonl. :L< ,
U l d t !
5 .
L
'
&
I;.

Dual Son]. gGG;

. 9&[a[
- ~12:
U. 5 - 0- 5
Gen.-hcc. #LAC:
. d+l.dt
, ;;G;
Plur. Som. -
cl/ - -
c;t9 J&
I'
clj~
-
Gen.-hcc. .
jwG &C;btj d
-0-

L.

'3) tf@fofi
Sing. Som.
Y
,-l
.- y
.&3!C --C

pt 9.-

1
Gen.
cc-
,-! .LT~ .-
&-! .
4 C
c / - / / *L.. -
Ace. ! F% f-, C.

Dual Non]. y t;iT +tjyt +I

.--
Gen.-.icc. p -. *F"
O r - Or -'I U
GJ~t
r r -
 jndeterlllillati cleternlinati determinati i n
cnnl articulo statn constructo

Plur. NOU. , +T(I~~!) 7 r -

b) genesis feminini

Sing. Norn.
B. .??C@

hcc.
kG i&l:fi :&L

Plus. Nom. &Oj

 Pararligmata.

TABCLA SX.

c) generis nlasculini in ,
, desinentis.
indeter- determinati determinati in
millati Cum articulo statu C O ~ S ~ ~ U C ~ O

Sing. Som.-Gen. *l; &Is"

Acc. ..-
&G
Dual Xom. 9~.. . k 9 .i [
;k..G h...G
.L ' L. ,c. L /
Gen.-bcc. b &ktl &L:
. a d
,
,L. ,. 9 .
Plur. Kom. b c'
)/ p b (1,dlj)
. Gj
Gen.-Acc. +.
..A
*
/

&% &G

Sing. Xom.- , '

l e;-; Z ,L/

Gen.-Acc.
'
Dual Nolll. G yl&iLJI
M . ,or
L&z.
Gen.-Acc.
9
+G,u[
. ....
F
, ,
,
Plur. ~ o m .
-0.-
r;'+
U / C Y C

U,.6t-Jt
U >C.
W
(l?=)
Gen.-Acc. ;m L:m'[
,:c
 Paradigmata. 25

indeter- deterluiuati determinati in

nlii~ati cunl articnlo statu constructo
Sing. Kom.- 1
G
- L&
Gen.-Acc. I
Dual Kom. g.! ~ ~ ' ( J

J
Sing. ~ o m . -
Gen.-Acc. l L/-
id. 6; L;;~\J/ I;;;
TABGLA XXI.
~ a r a d i ~ ~nonlinis
na cum suffixis.
a) ?lo?12i?iisnlosc. in shiytduri positi
5 S .
fe?~~ %>G.
.
cuni suffix0 1. pers. sing. fern.
~..2 G
, 2. ,, , masc. &.G
17 ,, 2. n ,, fern. .
& -G
G r 5 .

)l ,, 3. ,, ,, masc. GL~. (gen. ail-) F.

>, 3. ,, , fern.
X , 2. ,, dualis
k L;;)
.
3.
no 3, a 7,
-.
7) ,, 1. pluralis lTyG
hi
,, ,, 2. ,, msc.
n n 2. n ,,
1) 3. ,, mso. (gen.
.*
ii Y Y 6 -
n ,, 3. , fem.@Lfj. (gen.&G) F
.
Sonlinativus cum suffixo 1. pers. sing.
-
.. 2. .. msc. J c ; I etc.
~
--
!
,

Gen.--4cc. - .. 1. .. '-1
",5
- .) . 2. .. :, msc.&L:
...
.. G & +.

.. ,
J. ..
::
-...
I

. 3. . _. iem. ... etc.

C) in ylzcrrtli yosili.
izomi)zis )~zr/scu/i~zi
-
" -
d .

Son~inativuscunl suffiso I. pers. sing. &

L.-S
. 2. , . mrc. JkG etc.
Gen.-Act. .. 1. ..
.
n X
L. .
.. -. msc. A*L;lj.
.-
-
.. -3 3

12 .. :- 3. - :> msc. +,?l&

-
S r

.. .. .. 3. 3 i e m :..b. G . etc.
#

d) itonti/lis fenzhzini in plz~ralipositi.

?\Tom.-Gen.-Acc.curu suff. 1. pers. sing. LstilL
Nominativus :: 2. , :, MSC. &;til,*
? 9
:: . 3. :: :? G G L etc.
Gen. - Acc. : :I -.
-1 X : :, &.&G
X

:: ?, :? :
l 3. :, , , aj
.CcC;, etc.
,_
 LITTERATURA.

drabum litteratura ingens; at permulti libri per saecula amissi;

ma,ga gars in bibliotliecis exstat, de quibus catalogos manuscril~tornm
licet consulere. E librolum impressoium numero , quorum multi in
Orieilte iaprimis Biilaki prope a Cahira in luceni prod~erunt,quosdam
liic elmmerare placuit. Tituli librorum qnos tironibus praeceteiis
commendare juvat, crucibns notati, opera illustriora asteriscis insignita.
.Scriptorum iilclytorum nomiilibus anilum mortis (exempli gratia : 646 H.,
inc. 26. apr. 1245, h. e. anno Hejrae 646, qui iilcipit die etc.) addidimus.
- De libris nuper in Oriente impressis conf. ,,Pertlles, Verzeichiiis der
ron mir aus den1 Orient eiugefiil~rtenarabischen Biicher"; sire ,:E.
J. Brill, Catalogue pCriodiqne de limes orientausll.

A. HISTORIA LITTERARIA.
+ Bibliotlieca orientalis. Manuel de Bibliographie orientale. I. conte-
naut les limes arabes, persans et turcs imprimes depuis l'invention
de l'imp~imeriejnsqu'k nos jows taut en Europe qn'en Orient etc.
par J. TJL. Zenker. Leipzig 1846. - Bibliotheca orientalis.
Jlanuel de Bibliographie orientale. 11. contenant 1. suppl6ment
du premier volume. 2. LittQrature de l'0rient chrQtien. 3. LittB-
rature de 1'Inde etc. Par J. T ~ LZe'enkel-.
. Leipzig 1861.
-t@uting) Katalog der kaiswlichen Universitits- und Landesbibliothek
in Strassburg. Arabische Literatur. Strassbnrg 1877. 4'.
LiteraJurgeschichte der Araber. Veil ihrem Beginne bis zu Ende
des zmijlften Jahrhuuderts der Hidschet. Veil H U ~ I L Pi~r.7-
V~~Y-
stall. 7 Bande. Wien 1850-56 (quod opus, cnm aactoris jndi-
ciis non raro errores sint admixti, lectorem diligentem: criticurn
requirit).
*Lexicon bibliogaphicum et encyciopaedicum a Mustapha be11 Abdallah
Katib Jelebi dicto et nomine Haji Khulfu ( i celebrato com-
16%)
positum. Ad codicum Viildobonensium P~arisiensinmet Beroli-
 ~lenjis fidcm primum rdidit latiue r e r ~ i tet columeutado indici-
Lusque instrusit Gzisfacz~sFliiyel. Leipzig-London 1835-1S58.
7 vol. 4".
'.Jiitib al-Fihrist (auct. Ibn aLi ~ 2 l ; f i bal-nadiu~;scripsit anno 377 H.
inc. S mai. $187)nlit Anluerkuugen herausgegeben ron Gzcstuv
Fliigrl. Xach desseu Tode besorgt rou Jo7hanltes Rodigei und
dugirst Xiiller. Zn-ei Bande. Leipzig 1871-2.
The biographical dictionary of illustrious men chiefly at the begiuiliuq
of ls!amism by h b u Zakariya Jahya el-ATu~catoi (t676 H. = 1277)
edited Feud. Wiiste??feld. GGttingen 1842-47 (collf. iiber das
Leben und die Schriften des . . . . el-Kawawi idem. GGttingen
l e J 9 . aus den1 vierten Bande der Abhandl. d. kgl. Ges. d. JTiss.
zn Gijtt.).
','Ib,z C'iiallica~i,Jltae illustrium rirorum. E codd. nunc priulum arabice-
eJidit rariis lectionil~us.indicibusque locupletissimis instruxit F e d .
l r i i s t e ~ f e l d . Gijttingae 1~35-40, 40. - Ibn HallikZn (f 681 H.,
inc. I1 apr. 1262) 2. rol. Bulak 1 2 7 5 alt. ed. 1299. - l b n
Khallikan's biogralhical dictionaiy, translated from the arabic by
Baron X a c Gzrekin de SZulre. 4 vol. Paris-London 1813-71. 41'.

B. CHRESTOMATHIAE.
iChrestomacllia arabica quam e libris Mss. re1 impressis rarior~bus
collectam edidit F99. A. Bv)201d. Pars I. Textum continens. Pars 11.
Glossarium continens. Halis 1853.
iChrestomathie 818mentai1-e de 1'Arabe litteral avec un glossaire Ilar
H. Ddrenboztrg et J. Spiro. Paris 1S85.
TChrestomathie Arabe. ou extraits de divers 6cricaius Arabes, taut en
prose qu'en vers B l'usage des 8lbves de l'tcole speeiale des langaes
orientales uirantes; par A. J. +Yylvestvede Sacy. 11, &d. corr.
et augm. Paris 1827. 3 1-01. ; Tome IV Anthologie grammati-
cale arabe. Paris 1829.
Joh. Godofr. Lud. Eosegavienii Chrestomathia arabica ex codicibus
manuscriptis Paris. Goth. et Berol. collecta atque turn adscriptis
rocalibus, cum additis lexico et adnotationibus esplanata. Lip-
siae 1828.
Georg. Guil. Fwytag, Chrestomathia arabica, pammatica historica in
nsum scholanrm Arabicarum ex codd. ineditis conscripts. So maj.
Bonnae 1834.
 Litreratura. 31

'ker und JIeusch ror deiu litinig der Genieu. Ein arabisches DIahrchen
aus den Sclwiften der lauteren Briider in Basra im Ertext heraus-
gegeben Ton FT. Diefel-iei. '7. Ausgabe. Leipzig 1881. - Ara-
bisch-deutsches Wijrterbuch zum Koran nnd Thier und Dlensch
v011 Fr. Dieferici. Leipzig, I 88 1.
Girgass et de Rose)?. Arabische Chrestomathie. St. Petersburg 1875.
1876 (russice).
An arabic reading-hook compiled by TV'. wi.igl~f. Part fizst? The texts.
London 1Sic7.

C. OPERA GRAMMATICA etc.

a ctb Orie~zfnlibz~s
co~zscriyta(co~?S.de infiis stzidii graelstatici
spud A7 abes:

*Die grammatischen Schulen der Amber uach den Quellen bearbeitet

G. Fliigel. Erste Abthl. Leipzig 1862. Abhandlungen der
Deutschen DIorgelll. Ges. 11. Band. Nr. 4.)
* a]-Huz.i~irfi 'ulfim el-luga , Encyclopaedia philologica auctore Jaliil
al-din al-SuyZfT ( t 911 H., inc. 4 jun. 1505). Bulali 1262.
*'Le livre de Sibanihi, trait6 de grammaire arabe par Sibotiya, dit
SibaocaiJ~T(t 160 H., inc. 16 mart. 796). Texte arabe publib d'a11ri.s
lcs manuscrits du Caire, de llEscurial, d'oxford, de Paris, de
St. P6tersboul-g et de Vienne par Hartwig Derenboury. Tome I.
Paris 1P81.
*Al-Mufassal, ol~usde re grammatica arabicum auctore Abu 'l-&%sin1
+
Mahmfid bin 'Omar ZamahHario (at-Zaw~a@ari 538 H., iuc.
16 jul. 1143) ed J. P. Broch. Editio altera. Christianise 1879. -
Adde: Ibn Ja'i; ( t 643 H., inc. 29 mai. 1245) Commeutar zu
ZamachSal-i's Mufa~+al.Nach den Handschriften U. S. W. herausgeg.
U. S. W. von Dr. G. Jahn. Erster Band. Leipzig, 1882. (Zweiter
Baad. 1 Heft. Leipzig 1883.)
* Alfijjah, Carmen didacticurn grammaticurn auctore Ibn MHlik (1- 6 i 2 E.,
inc. 18 jul. 1273) et in AEjjam commentarius quem conscripsit
fbn Alril (Ibn ' +4 3 769 H., inc. 28 aug. 1367) ed. W.. Dieteriei.
.
Lipsiae 1851. - Ibn 'A.kIl7s Commentar zur Alfijja des Ibn Malik
aus dem Arabischen zum ersten male ubersetzt von FT.Dieteriei.
Berlin 1852.
a l - A j u h i j j a , grammatiea arabica auctore Ibn A ~ Z L ~ Yal-Siuhiiji
C~IL
(f 732 H., inc. 10 jun. 1323). Sexcenties impr. (Erpenii cura Leidac
1617) praesertim in Oriente cum commentariis.
32 Litteratura.

KSfija ti-lnahfi. syntaxis atctore I b n ((1-HGjiC (f 826 H.. inc. 28 apr.

1248). Sexcenties in~pr.in Oriente.

?Dr. C'. P. Crc{s-pcwi's Arabische Gran~ruatik. Vierte Auflage bear-

beitet von l z t g u s t Xulle~. Halle 1876. - Grammaire arabe de
C. P. Caspari trailuitr de la q u a t r i h e 6dition allenlande et ea
partie remanike par E. Liicoeclren. Bruxelles 1880. - -1(<rammar
I I the
~ Arabic Language translated from the Ge~nlanof C'aspari
and edited, ~ i t numerous
h adrlitions and corrections by TV. TIi.ig7rt.
2 ed. 2 vol. London 1874. 5.
Gee. Hejzrici Aug. Etrald. Grammatica critica linguae arabicae cnm
Lrsri xnetrolum doctrina. Liltsiae 1881-1833. I1 vol.
Grammake aral-e 5 l'usage cies tl6res de I'lcole sptciale cles Iangnes
r,lientales T-irantes; arec figures. Par X. le 1'" S i l r e s t ~ e cZe
~Tucy. Seconde fdition. co1lig6e c t augmentbe! il laquelle 011 n
joint un trait6 de la prosodie et de la mltriqne des -4rabes. :! tom.
Paris 1831. - Ad hoc opus coml~lendumet e r parte emendan-
dum pertinent Fleischeri
-:- .Beitriige zur arabischen Spraclkunde": Berichte uber die Verl~and-
lungen der kg]. sacllsischen Gesellschaft der \Yissenscl~afrell zu
Leipzig. Philologisch-historiscl~e Classe. 1863 (p. 93 ss.); 1864
(11. 265 SS.); 1866 (p. 286 SS.); 1570 (p. 227 SS.); 1874 (p. 71 SS.);
1876 (p. 44 SS.);1878 (11. 65 SS.); 1880 (p. 89 SS.); 1881 (p. 117 ss.);
168:; (P. i 2 SS.); conf. 1856 (p. l SS.); 1863 (p. 10 ss.)
.I. G. L. Kosegarfe?~. Grammatica lingnae arabicae p. 1-688, siue
titulo et allno, inconlpl. (liber rarissimus.)
M o ~ f i w l e rSlope;. Hozcell. A Grnnlnlar of the Classical Arabic Language:
tl-anslated and compiled from the Works of the most Approved
or Katuralized Authorities. Pablishecl under the authority of the
Government: S.-X.-Proriences. I n an introcluetio~l and Fonr
Parts. S tomi. Allallabad 1880. 1883.
Darstellung der arabischen Terskunst ruit sechs Anhangen U. S. \r. aach
handachriftliclieu Quellen bearbeitet und mit Registern rersehen
von C;. E.' Fveytag. Bonn 1830.
Thborie now-elle de la mttrique arabe pr8ckdte de considtrdiolls
gbnerales sur le rythme natnrel d u langage pax 31. Stanislas
Bzlyavd. Paris 1875 (Extrait du Journal asiaticlue).
Die Rhetorik der Araber nach dell wiclit,igsten Quelletl dargestellt und
mit angefiihrten Textausziigen nebst einem literaturgescl~ichtlicllen
~Inlianr:versehen, von Dr. A. F. 3Iel~ren. Kopenhagen 1853.
--P
 Litteratura.

D. LEXICA.

,s a l ~ l l al-'arabiyye
? (sire al-Sahsk) auet. al-Jazr~ari(AbG Kasr Isma'il
ibn Hammad f S93 H., iuc. 10 nor. 1002). 2 rol. Bulali 1282.
- ~ a l - I i ~ m i i s a l - m(-relal-FZrniis)
u~t auctore al-lGrEzZbc?dii(t 816 re1 817
H. = 1415,4.) 2 vol. Calcutta 1817; editio optima vocalibos notata
4 rol. 13ulali 1279. - Twcice exl~lanatus3 vol. Stanlbul 1972et al.
- Commentarium cui tit~dusest T5j el-'aiGs scripsit Sayyid Jfw-
.... .. al-Zubaidi If l205 H., inc. 10 Sent. 1790). 5 vol. (ad finem
'tar7Z
:
~

am) Cairo, 1286;i.

. . al-m*f, auctore BU(~PLS
Nullit. cl-BistCnf. 2 vol. Beirut 1286.
(1869/'0): -
Fil;ll al-luga,opuss~~oa~;micum, anctore al-TucCLibi(f 429 H., h c . 14 oct.
. 1037.) Cairo (sael~iusiqressum).
vGaw?ili@ al-&~Gai~ab (opus de rocibus peregrinis auctore al-JatrPli1;i
j- 465 H., inc. 17 Sept. 1072). Nach cler Leydener Hai~dschrif't
mit Erlauteruugeu t~erausgegebeu.v011 Ed. SaeBau. Leipzig 1867.
*Asas al-baliga (opus lesicogr. iml~rimisrerbornm sensum tropicunl
cxhibens) auctore al-Zanlu&ia?% (f 538 H., inc. 16 jnli 1143).
2 TO]. Bulali 1299.
Liber as-Sojutii (j- 911 H., inc. 4 jun. 1505) de nominibus relativis, in-
scriptns Lubb al-lubsb, arab. cum amot. crit. ed. P. J. Vetk. 1-3.
Lugduni Bat. 1840-51. 4'.
~:Al-3IoscIitabihauctore Schamso'ddiu Abn Abdallah Mohammed ibn
Ahmed ad- Dliahabi (al-DahabT 748 H., iuc. 13 apr. 1347).
E codd. mss. editus a P. de Jong. Lngduili Batav. 1881. (De
nominibus propiis homonymis).

+B. W. Freytag, Lexicon Arabico-Latinum praesertim ex Djeuharii

f?iruzabadiique et aliorum libris confectum. Accedit index vocunl
latinarum locul~letissimus.I V Tomi. Hal. 1830-1837. 4O maj.
G. W. Freytag, Lexicum Axabico-Latin~une s opere suo majore h
usum tironum excerpt= edidit. Halis 1836. 40 maj.
*Maddu-l-KBmii, an arabic-english Lexicon derived from the best
and the most copious eastern sources comprising a very large col-
lection of words and significations omitted in the Kamoos, with
Cc
31 Litteratura.

<n;,ylements to its abridged and detective explanations. aml~legran]-

matlcal and critical con~ments.and examples in prose nud X-erse:
composed by means of the munificence of the most noble Algernon,
Duke of Sorthumberland etc. etc. and the bounty of the Brltish
Go-iernment : by Edrcnrd W~llia7iaLane. In t ~ books: o the &st
containing all the classical words ancl significations cominoilly
known to the learned among the Arabs; the second, those that
are of rare occurrence andnot coinmoill~known. Book I, Part. 1-5.
London 1863-1874; ed. by Stanley Lane Poole. Part 6-7. fasc.
I. 2. S ibid. - 1854 (J):
*Sunuli.ment aux dictionnaires arabes 1)ar R. Dozy. 2 tom. Lerde
A a

1831. - Conf. Fleischer, ~ t u d i e n b e Dr O Z ? ~ Supplbment : Be-

richte iiber die Terhandlungen der 1ql. sachs. Ges. d. miss. zu
Leii~zig. PhiIo1.-histor. Classe 1881 (p. 1 ss.), 1882. 1883.
I. htr;i)tlirski 11e Biberstein. Dictionnaire arabe-francais I. 11. Paris.
186~i.
Vocabulaire arabe-francais (Cuche). Cej-routh 1883.
?A. Tt-alzr~~izmd, Hand~iirterbuchder deutschen und neu-arabischen
Sprache. I. Neuarabisch-deutscher Theil I , 1. 2. 11. 1. I?. -
I1 Deutsch-neuarabischer Theil. Giessen 1870-7;.
Dictionnaire dbtaillb des noms des vetements chez les Arabes. Par R.
Dozy. Amsterdam 1815.
*Glossaire des mots espaqnols et poi-tngais dCrivbs de Pdrabe par
R. Dozy et W. H. Engel),zcinn. 2. &cl. Leyde 1869.

E. KORANICA, ISLAMICA, VITBE MUHAMMEDI.

Al-Coranus seu L e s islamitica 3Iuhammedis filii Abdallae Pseudo-

phrophetae edita ex museo dbrahan~iH~7zckelman~li.Harpburgi
1694.
Alcorani textus universus summa fide atque pulcherrimis characteribus
descriptus, in latinum traaslatus, ol~positknotis, auctore Ludovico
Xavraceio. Patavii 1698 fol.
Corani textus arabicus ad fidem librorum manuscriptorum et impres-
sorum et ad praecipuorum interpretum lectiones et auctoritatem
recellsuit indicesque triginta sectionum et sui-ata~wmadclidit Gus-
 Lirteratura. 36

turzcs. FliigeE. Editio stereotypa C. Tauchnitzii. Tertium emelldata;

nova impressic $ L i ~ s i a e1869 (I. 1S54; recensiouis Fliigelianae
rextnm recoPitnm iternm esprimi curayit Gktsfaczcs LUazivitius
Beclslob, Lipsiae 1837). - Coni: $ Concordnntiae Corani arabicae.
Arl literalvn~ordiuem et rerbarum radices cWigenter disposuit Gtcs-
taclca Fliiye!. Editio stereotypa. Lipsiae 1842.
. . : r r l - l f @ C i t iY .ulfim al-&~l.'iin! opus de rebus coranicis auctore aZ-SzcyCtZ
(+ 911 H.. inc. 4 jun. 1505),; 2 part. C'airo 1478. - Say6ty's
Irqln on the exegetic sciences of the Qor'an. Eclited by J l o ~ l a w i e s
Easheeroocldeen and Soorool-Haqq ~ i t an h analysis by A. Sprenqer.
Calcutta 1852-54.
a?-blnblZf. Commentarius in Korauum auctore al-Zanza$8ari ( j 538 H.,
inc. 16 jul. 1143). 4 rol. Bulak 1281. - The Qoran with the
commentary of Zarnalrhshaxi entitled the Kashshaf an haqaiq
al-tanzil, ed. by W . ATassau Lees and E7caili?,z Hosain and 'dbd a1
Ec~yi. Calcutta 1856.
* Beidkawii ( t 665 H., iuc. 27 febr. 1286; re1 692) commentarios in
Coranum ex codd. Parisiensibus Dresdensibns et Lipsiensibus edidit
indicibusque instrusit H. 0.Fleisckev. 2 vol. Lipsiae 1846-48. -
Ii~clicesad Beidhawii conllrientarinm in Coranurn confecit l'li',land
Fel7. Leipzig 187s.
':'Le Recueil des traditions n~usulmaaespar Abou Abdallah ibn Ismail
al-Bofiari (al-Bnhgri $ "7 H., inc. 29 nov. 870.) p~ibliQpar L.
K)-ehl. 1-111 Ldyde 156.7-65. - Sael~iusimpressurn sine vel
c~imadjectis commentariis.
SaJ>X>XzrsZti,~.Collectio traditioilum prophetae auctore 3Iuslirn ($261 H.,
inc. 16 oct. 874). Cum commentaiio at-Ar'ctuatui ( j 676 H., inc.
- 4 jun. 1277) 5 rol. Cairo 1283.
Iby5 al-'uliim, opus theologicum a ~ ~ c t oar el - ~ a z a l i($ 505 H., inc. 10 jul.
1111). Bulak 1289. - (Conf. Richard Gosche, ijber Ghazz5lis
Lebeu und Werke: Abhdl. d. kgl. Akad. d. Wiss. zu Berlin
1858.)
"Das Leben Nuhammeds nach Muhan~medibn Is@k (f 151 H., inc.
56 jan. 768) bearbeitet von Abd el-Malik ih Eisci~am( t 218 H.,
inc 27 jan. 833); hrsg. von F. Wiistenfeld. 2 vol. Gittiugen
L858-60. (Versio germ.: Das Leben Nuhammeds U. S. W. be-
arbeitet von G. Weil. Stuttgart 1664.)
JIuhammed in Medina. Das ist Vakidi's (aLWZkidZ 207 H., inc. +
27 mai 822) Kitab a1 Maghazi in verkiirzter deutscher Wieda--
gabe herausgegeben von J. WeZl7~ausen. Berlin 1882.
.isarZ al-@be. Vitae 7500 virorum qui cum Mohammede convenerunt
auctore Ibn al--4t_'ir (f 630 H., inc. 18 oct. 1232). 5 vol. Cairo
1286.
Cc *
36 Litteratura.

al-Qibe, A biographical dictionary of persons \v110 knew Xuhammed Ly

Ibn Hajar (Ibn Hajar f 8.52 H.. inc 7 mart. 1448). Edited in
arabic by Noalawies Mohammed TVajyh, 'A bd al-Haqq, and Gholam
Qidir and A. Sprenger. Bibliotheca indiea. Vol. I, Calcutta 1856;
rol. IV, Calcutta 1873. 1-01. 11, fase. 1-5; rol. m, fase. 1-4,
Kiss? el-'anbiFi, (historiae fabulosae prophetarurn) auctore aZ-~$labi
(t 427 H., inc. 5 nov. 1035). Cairo 1'197 et saepius irnpr.
Ad-dourra al-fakhira la perle priieieuse dc GhazUi (t5u5 H., inc.
l u jul. 1111) par L. Gaufier. Geneve 1878. Eschatologia mnsli-
mica.

Der Koran nach Borsen ron Kruen] aus dem Arabischen iibersetzt
mit eii~erhistorisehen Einleitnng und Aumel-kungen ron C-. TThlrl.
Halle 18.78.
Der Koran. Aus dem Arabischen wortgetreu neu iibersetzt luit An-
merkongen ron L. Cllsza?~n. 6. Aud. 1862.
L e Koran, Traduction nourelle, faite SIW le texte arabe, par Mr. Ku-
ziniivski? h'our. kd. Paris 1854.
The Koran commonly called the Aleoran of Nohammed: translated
into English from the Ori,ainal Arabic. With explanatory notes
taken from the most apltroved commentators. To which is pre-
fixed a preliminary diseoul.se. By Geovge Sale. London 1774
et saepius.
J . M. Rodtcell, The Koran, translated from the arabic, 2 ed. London
1876.
The Qur'in translated by E. H. Palmer. 2 parts. Oxford 1880 he
sacred books of the East translated by various oriental scholars
and edited by F. N a s Niiller vol.. VI. X).
taGeschichte des Qorins Ton Theodor AToldeke. Gittingen 1860.
~ b e dier Religion der voiislamisehen Amber. Eine zur Habilitation
etc. ijffentlich zu vertheidigende Abhandlung ron Ludolf Krehl.
Leipzig 1863.
*Das Leben und die Lehre des Nohanunad naeh bisher grositentheils
unbenutzten Quellen bearbeitet von A. Sprengw. Zweite Aaxgabe.
Berlin 1869.
t D a s Leben Muhammed's. Nach den Quellen populiir dargestellt von
T h w h Noldeke. Hannover 1863.
W. Muir, The life of Mahomet and History of Islam. 4 voL London
1858-61.
TDas Leben und die Lehre des Muhammed. DargesWt von Ludolf
Krehl. 1. Theil. Das Leben des DIuhammed. Leipzig 1884.
 Litteratura. 37

Het mel;l;ausehe Feest.

-,Y,loz~ek-Hii,.gro~~je, Leiden 18SO.
t \ y a s hat 3Iohammed aus den1 Jndenthum anfgenon~i~len? ron dbra-
h a m Geiyrr. Bonn 1833.
B. Dozy. Het Islanlisme. Leiden lb63. '1 ed. Haarlem 1880; Essai sur
I'histoire de 1'Islamisme par R. Dozy trad. par V. Chauriu. Leyde-
Paris 1SiO.
Die 31uctaziliten oder die Freidenker im Islam. Ein Beitrag zur all-
gemeiuen Cultui-geschichte roll Hei?~ie,.ic7iSteiner. Leipzig 1865.
De strijd over het Dogma in den Islsm tot op el-Asli'ari door Dr.
-U. T7b. ~ o t ~ t s ~ nLeiden
a. 187.5.
Zur Geschichte Bbu 'I-Hasan al-&'ari's ( t circa 324 H. = 935) von
7~iZiielnz.S p t t a . Leipzig 18i6.
J. Goldzil~er, Die Scllule cler Zahiriten, ihr Ulsl~rnnq, ihr System
ulld ihre Geschichte. Leipzig 1884.

F. HISTORIGA.

I t n CoteibcL's (ibn Kutaiba f "76H., inc. 6 mai. 889) Haudbuch der

Geschichte herausgegeben vou Perd. Wustenfeld. GBttingen 18.50.
A n o n p e Arabische Chronik Band X I rermuthlich clas Buch der
Verwand tschaft nnd Geschichte der Adligen von Abnlhasau a h e d
ben jahjii ben gabir ben diiwud elbeladori elbagdiidi ( t 279 H.,
ioc. 3 apr. 892). Autogr. und herausgegeben von W. AAhEwardt.
Greifswald 1883.
*hnnales auctore Abu Djafrw: 3Iohammed Ibn Djarir At-Tabari (al-
Tabari f 309 H., ine. 12 mai. 921), quos ediderunt J. Barth, Th.
Wiildeke, 0.Loth (i), E. Prym, H. Thorbecke, S. Frankel, D.
H. Xiiller, X. Th. Houtsma, S. Guyard(f), V. Rosen et N.J.
de Goeje I, 1-5 ; 11, 1-3; 111, 1-6 Leiden 1879 seq.
t
Xacondi (al- Mas'udi 346 H., inc. 4 apr. 957) Les prairies d'or. Texte
et traduction par C. Barbieie,. de Meynurd et Pavet de Courtelte.
9 tomes. Paris 1861-77. (id. 2 vol. Bulak 1283.)
Hanyae Ispahanensis (scrips. almo 350 H.) annalium libri X. Edidit
J. X. E. Botlzcaldt. I. text&, 11. transl. Petropoli-Lipsiae 1844.
1848.
Historia saracenica, arabice olim exarata a Georgio Elmachio ((at-MaEn
t 6'72 H., inc. 18 jul. 1273), edita et latine reddita opere et
studiis Tlbomae Erpenii. Lugduni Bat. 1625.
*Ibn el-Athiri (ibgr al-At_% f 630 H., inc. 18 oct. 1232) Chronicon quod
perfectissimum (el - KLmil) inscribitur. Edidit Cnrolus Johannes
38 Litteratura.

T6~?1Lerg. 14 rol. Lngduni Eat. 1b51-1876. ( I 2 vol. Bulak

1290.)
Elfachri. Gescluchte der islaniijchen Reiche rom Anfan; bi: znm Endt
des Chalifates. rou ILILettAiqfhaqa (scrips. anuo 1303 U. a.) Aral~iscl~
lierausgegeben Ton Tf. I h l z c n ~ d f . Gotha 1860.
A t u ~ e d a e(+ 732 H., ine. 4 wt. 1331) Auilales muslemici arabice et
latiue. Opera, et studiis J. J. Xeiskii. nunc primnm ed. J. Q. Ch.
ddlrr. 5 X-01. Hafniae 1789-94. - '7 vol. Stantl~ul1286.
j Abulfedae histvria Anteislxmicn , AraGice e duob. Oodd. Paris,
edidit. \-erg. Iat. notis et iuclicibus auxit H. U. Fleiscker. Lipsiae
1891. S,.'.
Ihn Haldt71~( f - BUS H . . inc. 29 jun. 1405) d i l j a r etc. Hidoria ul?irn.-
salis. 7. 701. Bulak 134. - Pro1;golubnes ci'Ei~n-Khalduun.
Texti ar.?'re par QuatreszCre. 3 rul. Paris 183s (Sotices et es-
traits des inscr. SVI, 1. S'iII, 1. STIII, 1.) - Pi.c~l&gombnes
hietoriyues cl1II>11 Khaldoun. Traductiou par X a c Qvckilt de Slatre.
3 rul. Paris 1862-68 (Sotices et estr. XIS:I. SS. 1. =I. Ij.
The Taiikh :d-KholfAa; or I ~ i s t o rof~ the Calil~hS,frcm tile cleat11 of
Xohammad to the year 900 of the Hijrah by the celebrated JalLl
+
al-Din -41-Osyooti (al-SuyEti 911 H., inc.f4 jun. 1505). ed. by
1%'.K. Lees und Xawlawi Abcl al-Haqq. Calcntta 1857.
'"Liber e s l ~ u ~ a t i o n regionum
is auctore ImLrno A b e d ibn Jahja iba
+
Djab'i al-Baladsori (al-Baladuri 279 H.: inc. 3 apr. S9-7)ed.
X. 3. de Goeje. Lugduni Bat. 1866. 40
'Chronologie orientalischer Tolker von Albdi-itni. Herausgegebeu van
Edzin?.d Sackau. Gedruckt auf Kosten der D. N. Ges. Leipzig
ldi8. 40. - Chronology of ancient Kations. An English Tersiou
of tlie Axabic Test of the Athar ul BBliiya of Albini, or L'Vrsti,aes
uf the Past." Collected aud reduced to ariting by the Author
in A. H. 390-1, A. D. 1000. Translated and Edited, with Kotes
and Indes. bv C. E. Snchau. Published for the Oriental Trans-
lation Fund of Great Bl<taiu aud Ireland. Boy. 80. Lolldoll
1879.
Book of religious and philosophical sects by Nuhammad al-Shal~~astcini
(j528 H., iuc 29 malt. 1153). h'om first edited by V.Czneton.
2 vol. London 1846. - Abu-'l-Fatli ~uh'ammad ascl:-Scbah-
radni's Reli~ionspartheien und Philosopheuschulen. Aus den1
Arabischeu ubersetzt mit Anruerkungen ron Th. Haarbriieker.
2 Bande. Halle 1850-1.
Die Chroniken der Stadt Mekka. Gesammelt und herausgegeben Ton
Ferdit~atrdViisteqfeld. ( I
Azralri. I1 Fiikikihi: FSsi, I b a Dhuheira.
III. Kutb ed-din. IT. Deutsche Bearbeitung). I-IV. Leipzig
1857-61.
 Litteratura. 39

~ H., inc. 14 feLr. 1450)

Ui4lliueclis Arabsiadae (--l+,l~edi L i ~ ' d ~ a E b nf i 854
ritae e t . remm gestarulu Timnri: qui rulgo Tamerlanes dicitur
historia. (Ed.) Latine rertit etc. S. H. J1unyer. 2 rol. Leovardiae
1767. 1772.
Analectes SW l'lsstoire et la litt6rature des Axabes cl'Espagne par
A l - J l a k k a ~ i (al-xa$$ari f 1041 H., iac. 30 jul. 1631). Publi&s
par R. Dozy, G. Dzrgut, L. E ~ e h l ,et TV. TVrig7~t. 2 vol. Leg-de
185&-61. (Collf. Pleische~; Textverbesserungel1 in -11-31al;l;al-7's
Gescl~ichtsaerke:Berichte der Ken. sachs. Ges. der Vissenschafteu ;
Philol.-histor. Classe (XIX) 1867 p. 151-220; (XX) 1868 p.
236-309; (XXI) 1869 p. 39-116; -
147-210. Lettre a M.
Fleischer coiltenant les remarques critiques et explicatix-es sur le
teste d'Al-Dlakkari par B. Dozy. Leyde 1871). - Conf. The
history of the mohammedan dynasties in Spain by Ahmed ibil
3Ioharumed AI-BIakkad. Translated and illustrated by Pascual
de Gayangos. 2 col. London 1840-3. 4').
Historia Abbadidarum praemissis scriptorum Arabum de ea djvastia
locis nuhc primurn eclitis, auctore R. P. -4. Dozy. 1-111. Lugduni
Bat. 1849.
al-Hitaf (geographia et liistoiia Aegypti) auctore ul-ilIukrZzi (f 645 H.,
ine. 22 mai. 1441). 2 vol. Bulak 1270. - Histoire des Sultans
BIamlo~tksde llEgypte, Qcrite en arabe par Taki-eddin- Ahmed
Yakrizi, traduite en hai~lgaiset accom1)agni.e de notes par Q u u t ~ e -
1116~e. 2 vol. Paris 1837-45. 40.
Ablit -iUu+ci~il&ibn Tagri Bardii (t 874 H.? inc. 11 jul. 1469) Annales
(historia Egypti) I, 1. 2 ediderunt T. G. J. Juy~zbollet B. F. AIutthes.
11, 1. 2. ed. I! G. J. Jttynboll. L u g d ~ m iBat. 1852-61.
Husn al-muIxidara. Historia Egypti auctore al-SqtyCfT ($ 91 1 H., inc.
4 jun. 1505). 2 vol. Cairo.

*Die Gescl~ichtsclweilserder Araber und i l r e Werke. Von F. TViisten-

feld. (Bus dem XXVIII und XXIX B a d e der Abhandlungen
der Kgl. Ges. d. W. zu GSttingen.) Gottingen 1882. 40.
t Tergleichungstabelle~lder muhammedanischen und christlichen Zeit-
rechnung naeh den ersten Tagen jedes muhalrunedanischen Mo-
nats berechnet. Herausgegeben con Perd. WCslenfeEd: Leipzig
- - - -
1854.
Genealogische Tabellen der Arabiscl~euStamme rmd Familien . . .
Aus den Quellen zusammengestellt v011 Ferdina7ad Wiistenfeld.
Gittiilgen 1852. q.-fol. - Register z u den genealogischen Ta-
10 Litteratura.

bellen der Arabischen Grlilnme rind Familien. Xit historisc1~t.11

und geogral~hischen Bemerkuugen ron Ferdhzaltd Tiirfenj~eld.
Gottingen 1853.
* Caussin de Perceral, Essai sur l'histoire dcs lrabes araut l'islan~isu;e.
3 rol. Paris 1847.
*Geschichte der Chalifen. Sach handscbrifclicheu grijsstentheils noch
unbeniitztea Quellen bearbeitet v011 Gzmtav 7Fa.Z. 3 Bande.
Nannl~eim1846-5 l. - Geschichte des Abbasidenchalifats in
Eg)-pten. Vou Gustar. Weil. 2 Bande. Stnttgart 1860-2.
TGeschichte der islamitiscllen TBlker ron 3Iohammed bis zur Zeit
des Sultan Selirn iibersicl~tlich dargestellt ron Gu.stav We'eil.
Stuttgart 1866.
-f Geschichie der draber Lis auf den Sturz des Chalifats ron Bagdacl.
You Gzcsfac Fliigel. 2. dufl. Lei~izig1864.
- sources. London
ITT...Uuir, dnnals of the early C'ali1,hate &om original
1853.
Geschichie der JIauren in Spallien bis zur Eroberung Andalusiens
durch die Almorariden (711-11111). Ton R. Dozy. Deutsche
l w g a b e mit Originalbeitragell des Verfassers. 2 Bande. Leipzig
1874.
Poesie und Knnst der draber in Spanien u d Sicilien. Von AdoZf
F~iedrich r.01~Schack. 2 Bande. Berlin 1865. 2. A d . 1877.
Culturgeschichte des Orients nnter den Chalifen. Ton dvred col,
Ere9ner. 2 Bande. Wien 1875-77.
"Geschichte der herrschenden Ideen des Islams. Der Gottesbegriff,
die Prophetie nnd Gtaatsidee. Ton A w e d voia Erenler. Leipzig
1368.

G. GEOGRAPHICA.
a nb Orielltalibz~consreipf cc.

Das geographische Worterbuch des Abu 'Obeid 'dbdallal~ ben 'Abd

el- 'dziz el- Bekri (-f 487 H. = 1094) nach den Handschriften
zu Leiden, Cambridge, London und Nailand herausgegeben Ton
Ferd. Wiistenfeld. 2 Bande. Gottingeu, Paris 18i6. 1877.
*JacutYs (Yiikut f 626 H. = 1229) geogaphisches WSrterbuch aus
den Handschriften zu Berlin, St. Petersburg und Paris auf Kosten
der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft herausgegeben von
Ferdinnnd Wiistmfeld. 6 Bande. Leipzig 1866-73.
Jacul's Xoschtarik, das ist: Lcsicon geographischer Homonrme.
Herausgegeben von Ferd. Wiiste~tfeld. Gijttingen 1846.
Nnrasid al-itfi&'i, Lexicon geographicum ed. T. G. J. Jzly~abollI-VI.
Lugduni B. 1850-64. (Escerptum ex JE&I;ut.)
Al-HamdLni's (t 334 H., inc. 13 aug. 945) Geographie der Arabischen
Halbinsel. Nach dell Handsch. herausgegeben v011 David Heiq~ricl~
rUuller. Leideu 1884.
GQographie d'AboulfQda (-46.2-l-fid5 f- 732 H., inc. 4 oct. 1331). Texte
arabe par Reiltccud et Nac Cuekin de Sla?ze. Paris 1840. -
Gt.ogaphie d'Ismail Abou 'I-BQdZ cn arabe pub1ii.e par CItarles
Sci~ier. $d. antogr. Dresde 1846. - Gkographie d3AboulfQda,
traduite de l'arabe en franqais par Reiqlaud I. II: 1 Paris 1848;
11, 2 par S t n 7 1 i s . l ~Gtiyard.
~ Paris 1883.
::'Bibliotheca geographorum arabicorum. Edidit 1V.J . de Goeje. Pars
prima. Tine resorum. Descriptio ditionis moslemicae auctore
Abn IsI>Eli al-Faris? al-Istakhri (al-Is$a$ri, cf. Zeitschrift d. D.
JIorgenl. Ges. Bd. 25, 11. 42 ff.) - Pars secunda. Viae et regm.
Descriptio ditionis moslemicae auctore Abu 'l-KZsim Ibt Hazlkal
(ibid.). - Pars tertia. Descriptio imperii &loslemici auctore AE-
,Yokaddmi (al-Meaddasi scrips. anno 378 H.). - Pars quarta.
Continens indices, glossarium et addenda et emendanda ad part.
I-111 auctore M. J. de Goeje. Lugdu1.1i Bat. 1870- 1879.
The traTels of 16n Jubair ( h e saec. V1 H.) edited by TVilliaw~
TYngi~t. Leg-den 1852.
Vo-jages d'Ibn Batoutah (iht BafCta f- 779 H., inc. 10 mai. 1377).
Texte arabe, accompap6e d'une tradnction par C. Defrhnzery et
B. R. Sa?~guinetti(Publications de la SociQt6 asiatique). 4 vol.
Paris 1853-58; deux. tir. 1874-77.
ir

(Karte von) Arabien zu C. Ritters Erdkunde, Buch 111, West-Asien,

Theil XZI und XIII bearbeitet von H. Ez'epert. Neue berichtigte

. Ausgabe, die Orthographic revidirt von T h . Xaldeke. Berlin 1867

(D. Reimer).
Die alte Geographie Arabiens als Grundlage der Entwicklungsgeschichte
des Semitismus von A. S'prenger. Bern 1875.
Arabien im sechsten Jahrhundert. Eine ethnographische Skizze von
Otto BEau. Idit einer Karte: Zeitschrift der deutqchen morgenl.
Gesellschaft. Leipzig 1869 (XXIII B.) p. 559-592.
Arabien und die Araber seit hnndert Jahren. Eine geographische
und geschichtliche Skizze von AlbreeRt Zehme. Halle 1875.
12 Litteratura.

'-Beschreibung vvn Aratien. Bus eigenen Beol~achtungen und im

Lande selbst g-esnmnlelten Xachrichten abgefasst -con Carsteu
A-iehltr. Kopenllaqen 177.2. .iu.
t"Travels in Arabia ( l 8 14) com;,rehendiu; an account of those territories
in Hedjaz allich the JIol~ammedausregard ns sacred. By the
late JOJL~L Le~ciSB ~ ( r e l ; l i ( ~ ~ dL~o:~clon,
t. 2 ~01.18.29. - Johann
Ll~dtcigBl!rckhardt's Reisen in Arabieu: enthaltend eine Beschrei-
bring derjenigen GeLiire iu Hedjaz, rcelche die Xohamrnedaner
fur heiliz acilten . . . ;\us dem Engliscllen iibersetzt. Weirnar
IS3u.
G i c i ~ a ~Btrrton,
d Personal aarratirr of a pilgrimage to E l 3Iedinah and
Xeccah. I! vol. London Is57 (et saepius; etiarn in Taoehllitz
edition).
ddol1)k 2 . ~ 7Trt-erle's
~ Eeise iu Hadhamaut? Beled Belly 'Issil und Beled
el Hadscliar. Herctusgegeben .. . von H. Freil~errcorn 3laltzan.
Bmunschrcei; 1b;O. - Reise uach Siidarabien uud Geo,nal>hische
Porschuuge~~ im uad iiber den siirlwestlichen Theil Arabiens roll
Rei~iriclt.Freiherrii. c011 IlIalfzaiz. Braunschrreig 1873.

H. POETICA.
c b e r Pvesie und Poetik der Araber ron 'IVilI~elii~ Ahlzcardt. Gotha
1856. 40.
Bemerkungen iiber die ~ c h t h e i tder alteu Arabischen Gedichte mit
besonderer Beziehung auf die sechs Dichter etc. v011 W. Ahlwardt.
Greifswald 1872.
"The Diaans of the six ancient arabic poets EnnHbiga, ' ~ n t a r a .Tharafa,
Zuhair, 'Alqama and Imruulqais, ea. by TV. Ahlecardf. London
1Riit
A-. ".
Le Diwin de s2%ga DhobyQni publib par H. Derenbourg. Journal
asiatique 1868-9.
L e &wan d'Amro71kais par le Bon de Sia?~e. Paris 1837. 4U. (conf.
Amrilkais, der Dichter uild Kijnig. Ton Fr. Riickert. Stuttgprt
und Tiibingen 1843).
H. Thorbecke, 'Antarah, ein vorislamischer Dichter. Leipzig 1867.
f"Septem MJallakdt carmina antiquissima Araburn, textum etc. rec.
F. A. Arnold. Lipsiae 1850.
*Hanzasae carmina cum Tebrisii scholiis integris edidit, indicibus in-
struxit, venione latina et cornrnentario illustr. 0. B. Freytag.
3 701. Bonnae 18"-47 (coll. Abu TammHm f 190, inc. 27 nov.
 805; al-Tabrizi comm. i 420, iuc. 11 aug. 1108). Alia ed.
Bulali 1996. Collf. HamSsa oder die altesten arabischeu Tollis-
lieder, gesammelt v011 Abu T e m k m , iibersetzt nnd erlautert von
FriediicA Riicke~t. 2 T. Stuttgart 1846.
Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Poesie der alten Araber. Von Th. n'dldeke.
Hannorer 1864.
The Hudsailian poen~scontained in the manuscript of Leyden edited
in arabic aGd translated with annotations by2. G. ~.-lKose~a,ten.
Tol. I. London 1834. 40. - Letzter Theil der Lieder der Hu-
dhailiten , arabisch und dezrtsch : Skizzen und Vorarbeiten von
J. TeZlAausela. 1. Heft. Berlin 1884.
Divan de Firnzdak (+ 110 H., inc. 16 april 'is.)rhcits de DIohammed-
ben-Habib d'apr6s nu-el-Arabi pub12 sur le manuscrit de Sainte-
Sophie de Constantinople avec uue traduction fkancaise par R.
Bot~ehe~.Paris 1870. 40 (incoml~l.).
Cl~alefelaihntar's Qasside. Berichtigter arabischer Test etc. von A.
A7~lzcc~rdt.Greifsmald 1859.
Dinan des Abu Nowas nach der Wiener und Berliner Handschift
mit Benutzuug anderer Handschriften herausgegeben van W. AIL[-
~cardt.1. Die TVeiulieder. Greifsmald 1861. - Diwan Abi h'uwas.
Cairo 1877. (t ca. 195 H. = 810).
Mutanabbii (*al-iVutana6bi + 354 H. = 965) carmina cum commen-
tario Valallidiiprimum edidit, indicibus instrt~<t, varias lectiones
aclnotavit FT. Dieterici. Berolini 1861. 4u.
*KitZb al-agZnl auctore Abii 'l-Farag 'Ali al-IsfahGni (f 358 H., inc.
30 jail. 962). 20 vol. Bulak 1285. - Alii Ispahanensis liber
cantilenarnm maguus, ed. Xosegarten. T. 1. Gripesvoldiae
1S40. 4".

* (BibZia) KitZb a1 -mukaddas (Vetus Testamentuml. London. R.

.' w a i t s 1822. (Novum TestaAentum ibid. 1821.) +Beirut variae
editiones. +New York 1867. -
BorhLn-ed-dii es-Sel-nQdji (v. in fine XI1 saec.) Enchiridion studiosi.
Arabice edidit latine vertit et lexico explanavit Carolus Caspari.
Praefatus est H. 0. Fleisclier. Lipsiae 1838. 40.
44 Litteratura.

Definitiones viri meritissimi Sejjid Schedi -lli ben Xohammed Dsehor-

dschani (al-JurjinT t 816 H., inc. 3 apr. 1413). dccedunt de-
finitiones theosophi Xohji-ed-& JIohammed ben AJi v~ilgoILn
Arabi dicti. Ed. et adnot. critica iustrusit Gztstn~ltsFliigel.
Lipsiae 1845.
Statio quinta et sexta et appendix Iibri JIevakif auctore 'Adliad-ed-
din eZ-I$ (i 756 H., inc. 16 jan. 1355) cum commentario
Gorglnii e x codd. etc. edidit Th. Sirensera. Lipsia 1848. (who-
lastische 3Ietaph~sik).
Cosmographie de Chems ed-din Abou dbdallah3Iohammed ed-Di9i6ichqi
(al-DimiBhI+ 654 H., inc. 30 jan. 1256). Texte arabe publi8
d'apr,rPs 1'6dition commenc&eper M. Frahi~,6.t d'apres les mann-
scrits par -U.-4. F. JIe7~re11. St. Pefersbourg 1866. 40. - Xanuel
de la cosmographie du moyen Pge, traduit de l'arabe ,Xokhbet
ed-dahr fi'adjaib-il-birr~al-bah'rZ'de Shems ed-din Abou-'AbdaUah
Xohan~medde Damas et accompap8e d'6rlaircissements par X.
d. F. -3feAren. Copenfiague 1874.
*Zakarija Ben Xuhammed ben XahmGd el-Cnzlrini:s (al-Kazxvini
f 682 H.? inc. 1 apr. 1083) Kosmographie. Herausg. ron Ferd.
Wustenfeld. 2 Bsnde. Giittingen I84S-9. - id. nach der
Viistenfeld'schen Testausgabe etc. iibersetzt ron H m t n n n Ethd.
Erster Halbband. Leipzig 1868.
HayZt d - h i w a n . Opus zoologicurn, auctore al-Dnt1zG-Z (j808 H., inc.
29 jun. 1105). 2 vol. Bulak 1184.
" ~ l - ~ U a i d d n( i H., inc. 19 febr. 1124) Xajm; al-amt_Zl. Collectio
t 518
prorerbiorum. 2 rol. Bulak 1253. - h a b u m proverbia, voca-
lihus instrusit, latine rertit, commentario illustrarit G. W. Frey-
tag I, 11, 111 (9. b.). Bonnae 1838-43.
TLes colliers $or, allocutions morales de Zamakhschari (al-ZaazafiBari
+ 5 3 s H., inc. 16 juI. 1143) texte arabe suivi d'une traduction
franlfaise et d'un commeutaire philologique par C. Barbier de
Jfey~zard. Paris 1876.
dli's hundert Spriiche arabisch und persisch paraphrasirt von Reschid-
eddin Watviat, nebst einem doppelten Anhang arabischer Spriiche
herausgegeben , iibersetzt nnd mit Anmerkungen begleitet von
N. H. L. Fleiseher. Leipzig 1837. 40.
*Les dances de Hariri (al-HarIri f 516 H., inc. 1 2 mar. l122), avec
un commentaire choisi par Sz7vestre de Sacy; 1 &d. Paris
1822; 2 &d. par Rei~zaud et J. Uere~tbotlrg. 2 tom. Paris
1847-1853.
'The Kgmil of ELNubarrad (-f 285 H., inc. 28 jan. 898), editedfor
the German Oriental Society by W. Wright. Part 1-11. Leipzig
2864-S0.
 Litteratura. 45

Siret 'Antar ibu Saddid. 39 vol. Cairo 1256, (altera recensio 10 rol.
Beirut 1871). Conf. Antar, a bedoueen romance. Translated
from arabic by T. Ha~,~ilto)t.Part. I. i-ir. London 1820.
Alf laila wa-laila. Tnusend nnd eine Naclit arabisch. Kach einer
ECandschrift aus Tuuis herausg. roll ~ U a x i o ~ i l i HabicAt
an I-VUI;
foitges. rou H. L. Flezscher IX-XI1 vol. Breslan 1825 -43. -
The Alif Laila or book of the thousand nights and one night,
published from au egjq~tianNs. by W. H. Macnagiite?t. 4 vol.
Calcutta 1839-42. - 4 vol. Bulak 11279. Secundum editionem
Bulacensem priorem: The thousand and one nights commonly
called, in England, The arabian nights' entertainements. Trans-
lated by W. Lane. 3 vol. London. 1 ed. 1341. Alias editiones
ed. Edzc. Stanley Poole. (ult. 1882.)

t*An account of the manners and customs of the modern Egyptians,

written in E , ~ p t etc. B y Edtua~d TVillian~Lane. Variae edi-
4jones.London. -Laize, Sitten und Gebrsuche der heutigen Egypter.
Ubersetzt ron J. Zenker. 3 Bd. Leipzig 1852.
+*J. L. Burkhardt, Notes on the Bedouins and Wahhbys. 2 vol.
London 1831. - Bemerliungen iiber die Beduinen uud \l-ahabi's.
Weimar 1831.
Einleituug in das Studium der Arabischen Sprache bis Blohammed
..
nnd ZUUI Theil spater . v011 G. W. Freytag. Bonil 1861.
A. FOR TRANSLATION INTO ENGLISH.
50 Chrestomathia A.
 Chrestonlathia A. ?Il

1 g 94 b. 2 g 85 b. 3 g 67 a. 4 5 101. 5 95 a not.
Dd*
 'Q- 5 , -
.
,o

,
JL
F
J; Jy ~1 y5s

..... 3 $7 . jsG
5 ,+'G >dtf- s~ F-.j
0 ) U S r I

90,
&h g!,-)
E,, ,Y
m-tt
o YL-=
?+.G
L//
+L+
9 c - r

wY $1);
- 4;
E

,L, :g c) - C C . F
2$~, D

. dL- ,-S,, 9 ,ss .¶.

9) +l
"3
..,L
lij; O
9 - .
3 &'7 61. &,f 1 -
G *

. ---.. e J&z
'G
A);
c) ++U 21 A)'
L;
a Y ."S

5, B_. ,E ,i;_.od, ,d
..U &.by ) f 2f*&QG,& JG;
**-;. " p
1°&.. )
G, ' 0 9

Q . Q -
c
-Y
.
--GC-
.W1
.
,; ,C_
U
0 ,
&W! CP
.>O"= /M_. 5Gs& G,G
&S. 7 . 0 p-.,--g+ / F
a, > .Uro 5.

,;G $G-
S , l
?... F&
&-- ,
, - \
-
1 Q 73 d. 2 g 80. 3 h r . 27, 21. 4 5 47 a not. 5 S 84 a.
Chrestomathia A. 53
54 Chrestomathia A.

1 Sur. 27, 22-24,

 Chrestomathia A. 55
- 2 , s

, " 0 5 . *.

. U\ & f
..:.
F..

O c
.. U - 6 . U - = .,.-U*

lGlnj di') -1, %+l l+.+!

...
- . .
4;s -31 Y d G g
.0 Y .U* U ,
lvlJ1
B.u-2 G

_ &_!.G
Yl
0

1 8 98. . 2 S 7 b not.
 56

$7 @ ,+G; ".\&b -
Chrestomathia A.

/
/. 0

. -. -
l-& -'+,'F

. r
:ai
.
5
.,U,U-e

*ijLL+tl .
j by! -ty
- 9 0 5 G ..o.Q,

, , M'-= C- '9 0,

d+U~ L;? G 3LZ

..
I$ + +l) db
-
,
G
~ L
odc-o
^O

t
I
a!t I$@ hi)!
9 9 9 0 s

G 3~&)yf &. GG; & j-$

@
r

IO&
= .o
d l y &
.
Q ,r. Y Y
&S& a& LJ,!
- 0 s
4- C

I'
!'E? ,@S,& <
-& &,> z;&y 3 2
'
~
dY3
9

.-.'
*-F !S\-- &&
0

a
0 , v s , < 0 5

' 3 &L $.
$ r ;L&& G&,$'
F! U
4 + + ~ r * ~ * ;L;L. 3
15~r+T
l j F g sQr &
r ,
0 , c m

;l f

, ,
v"'
5 -

.s,i 9tj J?&

,,*
< *
;i.: ,5 4 t , 4 ~ 12; rrO a
-".,

1 47 e. 2 9 100 a. 3 $ 73 b. 4 Sur. 27, 27.

 Chrestomathia A. 57

1 g 6 f 3. 2 Sur. 27, 30-31. 3 Sur. 27, 28. 4 5 60.

 Chrestomathia A. 59

c-
Y

p?
0 , . 5. -.
L&, " C 5, ., &*1. aG
. IlL
l& 2&; usG G;; I.l'r .
G!&; ;l&, ytl '/0Y"-=

$1B ?
,+ 7; G;. ) G 1. G
.-; &.- Up? 0

0 0 - c . S ? 9 . ,/cu, 5
L+ 51 ',L& W.\. p t$b **+ lLLiij j l
+~$i..jG
'iu-*
G r ~ ._
..S
. . U C _.*
c +?
;W c)@T +lj ,< o 5
&i;;jT;
c , -yf
...
-
050-
U T
.
3; 4 5
0 c c ' r
A A,
U _ / / ,

is;&,$F ,.
,,
. a * /

kcfi~
&;
u a

ljl+l
- 0 5

.
-,E

& $$ &L;fll,.4t . yGy

*,U--

&L /

g& gb 4& Gwtj q>

- 0 0-

&'G $1744- C"r" "a . & cr M y

a
0
/- 3 G c Y c. S U. cc

&?
a g&W-. ~ i . t&at
a . +. U+,. El&h=
90s
p
U -,,, ~ - 3 0 -

U
, " " A..- .,
a;&?. +y P, 3
c , ,U,. / c

& a ;

--.. G;&jl =;Fj ,&;p=..U,--$G./

W= $. Jl &G;E &,4~ l y $$T; p " l y .€0-_ /U-*

15

...+.../ . . F.&.g g; ,
.s
a*U,
..)J.
9, 7 0 / 5-0, /U. 9.

. *

Sur. 27, 35. 39 a not.; 103 c.

60 Chrestomathia A.
 Chre stomathia 9. 61

.O

..
. .
,

. .
. U ,"-a

-2G
8 &g; . 90s.
. m c&_
j
9 M
M

I t, +*l! wGJ. / &

. .

.
.

1 3 99 c not. 2 64 a. 3 g 17 not.
5

10%

Is j
62

e,
@'-

Lt;;

-$>;
Lk2
+-
U

"r" -11- .:

P='
&L
u

.
-U\
"3s
'S

- lJ
$F,Jf: &+-'
,'

..,~ t A- + l l
$pi 7.

) ) Y E - &

p $ $'1
+.us!
"--G

- 0
i

),U"=.

... U+?!:
*il+ 5 1 2
, =. 5- -/.
J!t?.,

&-s v l . g - l . & d

&
0 0
Gl&l1

! L ,/
. S>. ! *'E;p
J

!p'
'!.U-=

,
0
d.

e 2 4 +Go &L

-+
.

*
0.OS

&C

.W

wy) g

--
je;; +&L
*
L .

,+b
'C_

JG :AT
0 %'

06.
&
'

s.

&+,.
j
Cllrestomatliia A.

, ,
c,
r

& .!,>a3
CC

_
+A!!

e't:
+
A
,,
5

',

0 6
'--*

- G

ul,A!l :)!;t
5L

/ -

O _

=-.

&J$
...g +.1 p+.' Jl3
.L,; glut rdN,..J~ +i;
'
g<'
,p,+is
3

.j;d.c

3 g (Jjj
*
X+
.
-.

. fl
J
.
. ..-
l

v'

+l),

' 0
e

-L
;
S
,,.us

.. &
'J
L (2;;&&&!

CL,

,
&
!;p
&l&J1

-> 1
. +G< i,L!"2)

-
., .

0 U=.

fg

.
>
~

G
/ -

b t,jF

C
.

,.-oz.

9
r&,~r
/
<_*Z

J&
to-

&G J,&+l
&
r/+
1 I \3
-

' b t U X L;
F ,L*>

'

&+ l;&,

0 .

; $.iT
~ 2 J&
-.
,,,*E

.L

U-
'

'
I

5,

03
1
era

3)3.

G
YC

. .9

J
-

0
G..".

-2

a3iy

d
,*

>m-=
*

at?
, .Er
JLy)

-
&

S=

6,
.

-11
...

*
it
Ls

c-

=,

,,

7-
64 Chrestomathia A.

1 Sur. 27, 36. 2 Sur. 27, 37. 3 5 93 d.

Chrestomathia A. 65
 66 Chrestomathia A.

W+
-J&
-2.
7.. -9
.-.-
!F LF
7- .U

0
C

.I;&; &i
, F >
<

-& :lC*
.-/
O r
.
=Z ,
. / r.. cs'*) .. & &.
A <

JG* hey!5 yudL---l

~"? wt.
- d o + '
U l ..
S 2
---
a p+
0 5 - . S .*..S .c

&! g G;! L1 +&tI &!l

-
2 ;GLJ
.. JG -I M e,F,
7 C,,.

*"L+
-0, c-,.
S-
.. ..
r

rcbrt 41 - G; tj?i;
,doe L s
&G -I
9 /- G.<

f -
AI 9
#U<

&fi 9Z h >+
.
2
- -.-
- G W
O F / o r

. /

t . . - Y . U 3 / ' , > 7

& tb JL~..A.+ .!,U* jG&

15 *2F1
p" 9 0 5 ,",
&-
05 , , u s 5 .yo.

f+jb
9 )ae/

-
*: ,1 &J /
I
3&9 G ,,F:+'
JG* G

Sur. 27, 39. 2 Sur. 27, 40. 3 Snr. 27, 41.

 Chrestomathia A. 67

/,.Z", '. .
Z
O
'
€
- '*.OS 7 - 0 s ¶.0*.7U
~153.+~t+~* XL!
x G 1 %L!,xKcl !,L+!, n;ua
l z o .

'&*.Y&U1d?U,
C G.o 9
or*
;ri
Y

2
U*.
p J!.

G m 3 0 u c

; 2 i 1, t l j l &i
>l, )'y ... a.!&% 9 a bdJ*
,
r r 0.0.. 9
uL.&
.UC

..
S

/S.
C

- 7 -.or

.
U. U G,.'. .U 0

t ) 5 % 2 , X-* & +r
. 'a r l.&sG31 t,Lb l&
- m c
. 5,. E* 'W., 0 6

3 UBt
. .- u~laT
lJ &&Lw
9 ~ 0 . 7

; 4G-
Q- &W bp! $;
',
O M

'
G%

. &y

L+ 3 tii3 &.+&&I p! a+?

a d
.
-

,
& :i;:T uJ.2 l.
,
su"r d< f3y!,
U. 0 E.
12G +-Q7d X
G€.

cC;'l "
d!
G*
. Y .)
8 4 7.
8Y7.w
. p, F.. G '
GJT48r*9
.
i' !*G* 2JG
.. r
3 ..C C
m*&X;
..-
.. A; s g ,
Z?-
)a.mrr as.
jb
. .". Y
+
.
C

,oz. -0.
;2.7
* 0 /
U

6@:&$- ij&~ u
i ~ i+~I U
&
. @ d
* 15

.d.$;
U.'; JG=-,l%$& 7- . .$-v O ' G

1 Sur. 27, 41. Sur. 27, 42.

E e*
68 Chrestomathia A.

1 Sur. 27, 44. 2 9 103 c not. 3 8 41.

Chrestomathia A. 69
70 Chrestomathia A.
Chrestomathia A. 71
 Chrestomathia A. 73

" A ,
50. /,7

) 1
,B =. g.:
.y, ejs &-
usp *FLL L
U
;- C .
& &*JI
: ; 1" fl

' o Y &if;-
C)Z .;A~ 5t 1 &U1
Y yl~ .~.- 5 $L;;
.
S&.
L.+SJI j&?I, rdj
.-. $1 P \ ~ I +G?\ &L
L; ?+;l1 &4 +l=
a),
d.,

@,
. r",.41
O

*t,i-)
.-
*+L!! \g&,
p21 is
 74 Chrestomathia A.

.
,* r-

&L..p) 2 ~ 1 6
&I
C /
? S or-

&id, XJ &Arj
7 C1

& ~;a) J& &T ' -.

&i J Jagbj
~ JLS
4 5 = , ./
&T &t XJ Jb) J, Gjs l i d 5 ,\+L
, W ,

A-
u s
~, 3 1 UIL'
+ . - ,
U
~ 2 &+L L-.
7
2 fyy:uE

ie~;\&- LP, d,,+ .,.,

Ua&
," 6 .i);d~ c,, 0,)
5 a;
lmu\
.--,r
+P ,
5
)L:3t) 02p&tl &%-
c,.-

8 J k . s @)
U r
+ >+l = - G
,
,
U +

S L

JA!) L
; 2; i i dJ1
,.&,yl+ d J13)
+S\, &&W
.
,aC1/
A= U a ~
0 . .
&)
-
\ 991 U4*&+l --
, U *

, .. ,,S
" :j
&)Lit m ,L&! g&
, *

25
IU , -
' 15; 9 >p, ;a! L&
- ,

q - - ~9 .l--- $2) G$
>&G\\ U, /

,.AS
* / U *
ilxri: ,
- .-
-1 - y
.j- ,, A

_
-
bY.2 sj, g i s !
.* / - -
2 - 7
p &A&
*% &)&X3
P-

. ,C

&t
Y

,S)

G 6:
. dq. +&XI Y 0 7 9 - 9 - Y G.<
p*
- .
0 0 Y Y ).,or
,D)
>C&/ C

l5 slay& ujK b &+ +\ - =A&& UJ

4.2
'Lbw!,
-
'p1fl ji' ".'X ",jut y
, U , ,-- -0-
)
9.3 _ * y
&rCV "L
5 Y 0 7,f Q , . 5 ))/O)

dc+G~l ye4
, J)I 9, y~ ,?I &..X+$
Chrestomathia A. 75
76 Chrestomathin A.
Chrestomathia A. 77
78 Chrestomathia A.
80 Chrestomathia A.
82 Chrestomathia A.
 Chrestomathia A. 83

;)CS, (Q! @ "F &L &

+ *
Jb !jSiq J.& W? LU W~ JLG b&L+
-
Jk&I & c", 4 '5' tj"
I
'&
."- !F)
- 0 - M

l ,, i - 8,
'i
W a *U *a$

U,
d
7 t l ) l &a
-
h 'L.&& >l
0 9

0K +',.fl ;l Jb,
-
*G&]Go
Chrestomnthia A. 85
 B. TO BE TRASSLATED I X T O ARABIC.

I'relintinary remarks.

Words included within brackets [ I are to be omitted in trans-

lating; those within parentheses ( ) either represent an Arabic
word which is to be added, or give the literal translation of an
idiomatic phrase. Nominal sentences are distinguished by a
bracketed verb (usually a form of 'to be'') or pronoun between
the subject and the predicate. In the other (verbal) sentences,
the verb is to be placed before the subject; the object of the verb
is to be placed after the subject, if it is a noun, and after the verb,
if i t is a pronoun governed by the preposition belonging to the
verb. A pronoun in the accusative is of course always a suffur
(S 11 b, but cfr. 5 46). I n general the position of the Arabic
words has been retained as far as possible. The English past
tenses are usually to be translated by the Arabic perfect, the
present and future by the imperfect. All Arabic nouns, not in
the status constructns, receive the article, even when in English
it may be wanting, except those which are distinguished by
having the indefinite article 'a, an" before them (cfr. 5 84 b). a d -
jectives must follow their nouns and agree with them in gender,
number (but cfr. 5 62) and case. Pronouns agreeing with verbs
are not to be separately translated. A preposition after a verb
is nsaally entered in the glossary under the heading of the verb;
if not found there, it must be looked for separately. Exceptions
to the above rules are pointed out in the notes.
 Nominal Sentences.1
1. The glory of the man [are] his sons, and the
solicitude of the man [are] his dwelling and his
neighbour.-2. The elegance of the man [lies] in his
tongue, and the elegance of the woman [lies] in her
understanding.-3. The liberal [man is] related to
God.-4. The worst of repentance [is] a t the day2
of resurrection.-5. The love of the world [is] the
beginning of every sin.-6. The promise of the king
[is] a security.-7. The learned [men are] the heirs
of the prophets.-8. Wisdom [is] for the character3
like medicine for the b0dy.~-9. The worId [is] the
prison of the believer and the paradise of the unbe-
liever.-10. Contentment [is a part] of4 the nature3
of the domestic animals. - 11. The malady of covet-
ousness has no (not is for i t a) cure; and the disease
of ignorance has no (not is for it a) physician.-
12: The nutriment of the body3 [are] (the) beverages
and (the) viands, and the nutriment of the under-
standing [is] wisdom and learning.-13. Money has

l 92 seqq. 2 $ 82 a. phr. * &.

(to money [is]) a difficult entrance and an easy exit.-
14. T;erilyl God [is] forgiving and2 compassionate.-
15. Verily ye3 [are] in a manifest error,--16. The
nobles of4Pharao's folk said5, ':Verily this [is] surely6
"a learned enchantern.-17. VeriIy in thati [lies] surely
an example for the unbelievers. - 18. Flight in its
[proper] time [is] better than endurance i n its wrong
time (in another than its [proper] time). -19. There
is no (not5 [is there]) strength and no (nots) power
except with God, the High, the 1fighty.-20. The best
of gifts [is] understanding, and the worst of misfort-
unes [is] ignorance.-

Verbal sentences.
a. The sfrong verb.
21. Jonah came out from the whale's belly.-
22. Zaid killed Muhammed. -23. They gave (beat)
Omar aviolent beatingt0.-24. The direction of prayer
was shiftedti from Jerusalem to Mecca.-25. God CS]
cognizant of what ye are doing.-26. Verily7 God

1595a. 2$97. 3sufik. 4 . 5perf.sing.891a.

6 95 a. rem. 7 8 95 a. 5 81 b. 9 9 90 seqq. 10 5 80.
11 ren~,
 provides for every one his sufficiency.-27. Learning
and money [they] cover upi every fault, and poverty
and ignorance [they] uncover' every fault.-2s. They
took him away and put him in the bottom of the
well.-29. The brothers of Joseph r e t u r n e d 9 0 their
father.--30.) Why hast thou3 not4 washed thy shirt?
-31. The most5 of mankind are not grateful2.-
32. They' [are] unbelievers i n i the future life.-
33. We made heaven [to be] a [well-]preserved roof.
-34. Do not do good out of%ypocrisy, and do not
leave off [doing] i t out ofS modesty.-
35.'Why do ye render waste the cultivatedYcoun-
tries?-36. Thereupon we sent Moses and his brother
Aaron with our signs to Pharao and his nobles ; then
they declared the two of themf0t o be liars.-37. The
angels saidii, UOMary! be obedient to thy Lord and
"prostrate thyself; verily l-od giveth thee glad
"tidings of a Word from him; and hei3 [is one] of1*
"thosei5 who are placed near [to God], and he shall
Utalk to mankind in the cradle!"-38. It is not good
to.. hurry (not is good the hurrying), except in the

1 dual. 2 plur. 3 fern. 4 5 76 c. sing. 6 pronoun.

I V- 5 S2 d. 9 5 62. 10 s u f k in the dual. 11 5 91 b;
12 95 a. 13 pi-ononn. 14 e. 15 part.
marrying of a1 daughter, and the burying of a' dead
[man], and the entertaining of a1 guest.-39.) Glorify2
God in the early morning3 and [late] in the evening3.
40. Verily the hypocrite has (to the hyp. [belong])
three characteristics; his tongue contradicts his heart,
and his speech his action, and his exterior his in-
terior.-41. The men of his people used to sit with
him4 on account of his learning. - 42. Verily the
holy war [is] incumbent5 on you.-43. The vehemence
of a (the) man [is what] causes him to perishG.-
44. The head of al-Husain the son of Ali was brought
into the cityi of Damascuss and was placed before
Yazid. -45. Verily w e q a v e become Muslims, so
become Muslims ye1" [also] !-46. Do not talk to
one another with disgraceful talk!-47. Every thing
has (to every thing [belongs]) an indication; and the
indication of understanding [is] reflection, and the
indication of reflection [is] being silent. -48. We
started off towards Bagdad t o bring an action against
one another l1 beforel%ts l3governor.-49. The most
excellent [kind] of praise [is], "[there is] noi4 ggd
-.

1 S 84 b. 2 plur. 3 indeterm. accus. 5 82 a. 4 &gsing.,

then subject, then the verb iu the plur. 5 Part. 6 nominal
sent. 8 92 c a. 7 acc. 8 88 a. 9 5 71 c. 10 pronoun.
11 part. 5 82b. Ji
12 13 g 50. l4 S 81 b.
 Chrestomathia B. 91

except God!" and the most excellent of [good] works

[are] the five1 prayers; and the most excellent [kind]
of character [is] (the) being humble. - 50. They
fought with one another four days;2 then the Byzan-
tines were routed 3. -51. What is disliked i n "he
king [is] the being devoted to (the) pleasures, and
the hearing of (the) ?songs and the spending of (the)
time therewith (with that). - 52. They said, " 0 our
"father! verily we5 went away, running races6, and
"left Joseph withi our baggage; then the wolf ate
"himn.- 53. Observe what [is] in the heart of thy
brother by means of his eye, forS the eye [is] the
title-page of the heart!-54. In the fourth year from
the birth of Muhammed the [two] angelsg cut openi0
his belly and extracted" his heart; then they cut iti1
[his heart] open and extractedi1 from i t a black clot
of blood; thereupon they washed1' his heart and his
belly with snow.-55. They conversedi' about the
case of the Apostle.-
56. Verily God hath (to God [are])I3 servants
whomi4 he distinguishes (he distinguishes them) with

1 masc. determ. after the noun, 8 67 a. 2 5 S2 a. 3 fern. sing.

4 J. 5 8 71 0. 6 imperf. merely, 8 100 b. 7 G , with gen.
B 'C
g. 9 dual. 1osing. S Y l a . Ildual. 12591rem.a.
13 8 95 a 14 without relative particle 8 99 b.
92 Chrestomathia B.

his favours.-57. Restrain thyself from meat whicli2

causes thee to acquire an indigestion, and [fl-om] an
action which2 occasions.thee regret3.-58. Thou hast
fallen in love4 with a girl, a possessor of beauty%nd
elegance%-59.1 Xuhammed said, "Help thy brother,
"[whether he be] doing wrong5 or wronged5!" They
asked, " 0 Apostle of God! how shall we help him,
"[if he be] doing wrong"?" He said, "By restraining
"him from doing wrong!"-60. Do not turn away6 a
-
beggar! 61. A servant does not believe, until he
love for his brother that which lle loves for him-
self. -

b. The weuk verh.

62. A poor [man] begged of me, so I gave him

[two] pieces of moneyi.-63. Be mindful of death,
for hes takes hold of your forelocks; if"e fly from
him, he overtakes you, and i f 9 ye stay, Ire seizes you.
-64. Music [is] like the spirit and wine [is] like
the body; then through their l0 being combined *is
born joy.765. The Apostle used toi1 preach to his

indetem. 2 without relative particle 99 b. 3 indet.

4 73 e. 5 8 82 b. 6 5 35, rem. 1. 7 dud. 8 pronoun with
foll. part. 9 102. '0 dual-suffix. 11 cfr. p. 90, rem. 4.
companions and to exhort them and to teach them
the beauties of character l.-66. Verily2 our friends
shall%ntrust to u s their secrets.-67. The lust of4
the world [it] entails care and sorrow, and abstinence
with regard to it [it] restores the heart and the body.
-68. Moses said, "I have brought5 you an evidence
ufiom your Lord; so let go%long with me the Sons .
"of Israel!"-69. Depend on the Living [one], who
does not die!-70. He pleases me, who makes poetry
toi show his education, not toi gain, and applies him-
self to singing to7 enjoy himself, not t o i seek for
himself [reward]. -
71. Demand help of the good
(peopleS of the good), and of those that act well (and
of the acting well).-72. Chooseg whichever of the
pages thou wilt !-73. Supplicate much (make much
the supplicating), for thoui0 dost not know when
answer, will: be given thee! -74. Restrain your
tongues and lower your glances and guard your
continence ! -
75. A (the) kingdom [it] 'l is made flourishing
thpough justice and is protected by courage and is
;uled through [good] government.- 76.[Good] govern-

1 pl. detkrm. 2 5 95 a. 3 L $ 74 a. 4 9 S 73 e.
6 sing. 7 5 82d. 8 5 88 b. 9 fern. 10 3 71 c. it nom-
inal sentence.
ment [is], that l the gate of the chief be guardedg in
the [proper] time of being guarded3, and opened i n
the [proper] time of being open3, and the gatekeeper
friendly.-77. Jalkl-al-din used not to go to sleep4
except drunk5, nor (and not) to arise in the morning
except seedy and tipsyc. - 78. I t is not seemly for
the wise [man], thati he address a (the) fool, like as
it is not seemly for the sober [man], that he address
a (the) drunken [man].-79. PeopleS of the world
[are] like folk in a ship, whoY are carried onwards
whilst they are sleeping 1°. -80. The evil-doer F e ]
does not consider1' mankind except [as] evil, because
hel2 sees them with the eye of his nature.-81. God
elected Abraham [as] an intimate friend.-82. Every
affair in the world [is] transitory.-83. Wickedness
[is] to be fearedi3, and no one (not) fears i t except
the intelligent [man]; and good [is] to be hoped fori4,
and every onei5 seeks it.-84. [To] a servanti6 shall
notii be given [anything] more ample than kndu-
rance.-85. I looked into Paradise, then I saw the
most of its inhabitants [to be] the poor; and I looked

,
1 S 96. 2 &g with part. 5 81 a. 3 5 34rem. 4 cfr. 5 p. 90, n. 4.
5 S82b. 6 582b. 7 $96. 8 388b. 9 §99b,o. 'o§100$
11 5 92 c, a. 12 suff. 13 3 77 b. 3 39 b. 14 5 40 rem. .c 15 k1.
16 5 79. rem. b. 17 eJ/ 5 75.
 Chrestomathia B. 95

into hell-fire, then I saw the most of its inhabitants

[to be] (the) women.-86.) Hei whose counsel is
asked [is] one1 in whom one confides; and he1 who
asks counsel [is] one1 who is to be aided.-87.) Do
not put off the work of to-day till to-morrow<-
88.) Thou dost not%ee in the creation of God any5
imperfection.-89.) Little which1 continues [is] better
than much which is interrupted. -90. Pharao said,
"We will6 kill7 their sons and spare their women."-
91. A Bedouin looked a t a gold-piece; then he said,
"How smalls is thy size and how greats thy value!"
-92. The envious [man] is not well-pleased with
theeg, until thou diest!-93. Be [the] tail and be
not [the] head ! for l0 the tail escapes whilst l' the
head perishes.

111.

Various subordinate sentences.

.94. Muhammed said, "Do not begin12 with the

Jews and the Christians by (the) greeting, b u t when

I part. 2 5 76 b. 3 indeterm. 4 L. 5 93 b. 6 A,
9 74 a 7 8 . 8 S U. 9 verbal sentence! 10 5 95 a; nomin.
sent. 11 100 a 12 plur.
yt: meet one of them', (then)' force him towards the
narrowest place (his narrowest).-95. When comes
to thy knowledge concerning thy brother what is evil,
then seek for him a n excuse; but if thou dost not"
find [one], then say, "Perhaps he has an excuse."-
96. I f 4thou eat little, thou shalt live long.-97. If "e
talk in a good manner (make ye good the talk), ye
shall enter Paradise.-98. Ali said,-may5 God be
well pleased with him"-"0' mankind! do not hope
except for your Lord, and do not dread [anything]
except your transgressions; and be not he ashamed
whoS doth not know toglearn, and be not he ashamed
who%noweth t o teach!"--99. The subsistence which
thou seekest is like the shadow (the likeness of the sub-
sistence.. .[is] the likeness of the shadow) which moves
on along with thee; thouio dost not overtake it in
pursuing11 [it], then when thou turnestl%way from
it, it follows thee! 13-100. A man said to the Apostle
of God: "0 Muhammed, give me thy: cloak!"; then
he threw i t down t o 1 9 i m ; then he said: do nott5
want itn; then he (Muh.) said, "Mayi6 God combat
thee! thou didst wish t o Ydeclare me to be niggardly,
G 5
1 with gen. 2 5 104 c. 3 $5-102, 76 G
&\ 5 103 b.*
5 5 73 d. 6 after the subject. 7 @.\L S 61. G. 57
with subj. 10 pronona 11 part. 82 b. 12 5 101. 13 perE
4 J 1.i; withimpert 16§73d.
but (and) Gocl has not made1 me [to be] niggardly!';
-101. If anyone2 long for Paradise, he is unminclful
of lusts3.- 102. That a Inan give in alms in his life-
time a drachma (the alms-giving4 of a man-a
drachma) [is] better for him than that he give in
alms a hundred drachmze a t his death.
103. The Prophet-may God bless him and save
him- said, "If anyone5 drink wine in this worlcl,
[and] thereupon do n o t 6 repent, he shall be for-
biclden it7in the future life."-104. If anyone light
a lamp in a mosque, then verily the angels [they] will
beg forgiveness for him as long as-hat lamp con-
tinues kindledg. -105. The reed-pen [is] a tree,
whoseio fruit [are] the. ideas, and thought [is] a sea,
whoselo pearls [are] wisdom.-106. Verily the dead
[man] and he who" has no religion (he who no1'
religion to him) [are1 equali3; and he has n o i ~ r u s t -
worthiness [in him] who': has nol"iety.-107. Every
woman thatx4 has no1' modesty [is] like a dish that
has noi2 salt. -
108. If anyone's1' tattle is much,
his erring is much [also]. - 109. The anger of the

1 76 c. 2 5 determ. 4 inf. 5 9 102. G

102. 3 5 76 C.
7 5 79 rem. b. 8 5 101. 9 partic. pass. S 81 a. 10 5 99 b.

11 G. 81 b. 13 sing. 14 5 99 b, c. l5 99 c.

Gg
98 Chrestomathia B.

noble [man], although his fire flare up', [is] like

smoke of wood2 in which [there is] no3 core.-
110. To the ignorant [man] are forgiven4 seventy"
transgressions, ere to theknowing [man] is forgiven one.
111. Be n o t v i k e the needle, whichi clothes
mankind whilst' it [is] naked, nor (and) like the
wick, which7 gives light to mankind whilst it is con-
sumed" - 112. The believer [he] does not escape
from the chastisement of God, until he leave four
things, lying, and pride, and niggardliness, and evil
thinking (evil of the thinking).-113. I t is seemly
for the younger [ones] to1' precede the elders in
three places; when1' they travel by night12, or wade
through a stream, or encounter horsemen.-114. Do
not drink (the) poison out of reliancei3 on the anti-
dote which thou hast (that which [is] withiQhee of l5
the antidote).- 115. Paradise is desirous16 of four
[kinds of] folk; the firstii of themiS [are] those who
have fedig a hungry [man], and the second [are] those
who have clothedlg a naked [man], and the third [are]
those who fast 20 inz1the month of RamadBn ", and the

,1 5 102. 2 indeterm. 5 99 b. 3 81 b. 4 5 91 a. 5 8 67 b.
6 y with energ. L 7 8 99 b, rem. 8 5,100 a. 9 5 100 a, with
imperf. 10 5 96. 1% 5 101. 12 5 82 a. 13 5 82 d. 14 a.
15 +. 16 psrt, 17 masc. 18 & in fern. sing. 19 perf. sing.
20 imperf. sing. 21 5 82 a 22 5 88 a.
 Chrestomathia B. 99

fourth [are] those who read1 the Koran. - 116. So-

crates was asked, "Why hast thou n o t h e n t i o n e d in
thy law-code the punishment of him who kills3 his
brother?" He said, "I know not that this [is] a
thing which exists." - 117. Every thing [it] begins
small" thereupon it becomes great, except misfort-
unes; for it begins great, thereupon it becomes
small, and every thing [it] becomes cheap, w h e n q t
becomes a%undant, excepting education; for7 when it
becomes abundant, i t rises in value.
118. After Moses had returned to the Sons of
Israel with the Thora (and along with him [was] the
Thora), they refused to S accept it and to do according
to what [was] in it.-119. God commanded Moses
t o v a s t thirtyg days and to purify himself and to
purify his garments, and to come toi0 the mountain,
that he might talk to him and give him the book.-
120. After Damascus was taken1', much folk of" its
inhabitants joined Heraclius, whilstt3 he was int4An-
tioch.-121. A certain one of the wise men said,
Nothing (not) repels the onslaught of the conquering

1 imperf. sing. 2 $ 7 6 ~ . $ 5 102. 4 582b. 5 aocus. 898.

6 8 101. 7 with SUE 71 C. 8 &\ with subj. Q 8 82 a.
10.!J
11 fern. 8 50. e.
l2 13 100 a.
.
v.
14

Gg*
 enemy like' being submissive and giving way, like
as' green plants are safe from the vehement wind
through their pliancy, because they3 turn along with
it, as it turns.- 122. They disagree5 concern-
ing Waraka; and of" them [there are] those who
assert1" that he7 died a Christianhnd did not9 reach
the appearance of the Prophet; and of" them [there
are] those who are of opinion"' that bei died a
Uuslim. - 123. 0 [ye two] companions" of the
prison! as to the one of youit, he shall serve to his
lord wine", and as to the other, he shall be crucified,
then shall1" the birds eat of'; his head; the affair is
decreed14 concerning which ye inquire! - 124. The
Apostle wrote to chieftainst2 ofQhe tribes, invitingt5
them to become Muslimst6.-125. A wise [man] was
asked, W h a t [is] the thing, which [it] is not good
that i t be said, although it beti right?" He said, "A
man's eulogizing himselfiS". - 126. Woe to [him]
who converses with lying, t h a t he may make the
people laugh by i t !-127. This (the) world and the
future life [are] as the East and the West: when thou

1 A*,
9
as subject. 8 94 b. 2 3 95 a. 3 ring. NB.
4 S 102. 5 73 b with S,5 91 rem. a. 6 . 7 5 95 a.
8 5 82 b. 9 $j76 c. 10 8 73 b. 11 duaL f? indetenn. l3fem.
14 8 73 c. 15 74 b. 16 infin. determ. 17 8 102. 18 87.
 Chrestvmathia B. 101

apl~roachestone of them', thou dost recede from the

other.-128. Fear ye God in secrethand do not
enter into what is not lawful for you!-129. The
devotee without learning [is] like the ass of the mill,
who3 goes around and does not get through (cut) the
distance.-130. The eye of hate [it] draws forth
every fault, a ~ l dthe eye of love [it] does not find
the faults.

IV.
Anecdotes.

131. An astrologer was crucified; then he was

asked, "Hast thou4 seen this in thy star?" Then he
said, "I saw a raising up5, however I did notGknow
that i t [was to be] upon a piece of wood!"
132. A man knocked a t the door of 'Amr the
son of 'Ubaid; so he said, "Who [is] this?" He 'said,
"1." He SAmr] said, "I do not know (I a m not I
kpow) among our friends (brothers) [any] one7, whose
name [is] I."

1 dual suffix. 2 detem. 3 $5 84 b, 99 b, 56 c. 4 with

$/S
5 51 a, rem, b. 6 5 76 c. 7 h\.
102 Chrestomathia B.

133. (The) thieves came1 in upon Abfi Bekr aI-

Rabbiin?, seeking50mething (a thing), and he saw
them going a r o u n d q n the house. Then he said, *O
ronng men! This which Fe are seeking4 in the night
we have already sought4 in the day-time, but have
not5 found it!" So they laughed and went out.
134. I t is relatedF, thati a certain one of the
polite scholars eulogized a certain one of the princes;
so he commanded [that] to him an [ass's] saddle and
saddle-girth [should be given]. So he took themS on9
his shoulder and went out from his presencelO. Then
a certain one of his companions saw him, then said,
%What[is] this?" He said, dI eulogized the prince
with the most beautiful of my poems, then he in-
vested me with [something] ofii the most glorious
of his dressesn.
136. Al-Mu8ra, the son of ~ i b said: a No one
(not) l' has deceived me escept (another than) a
youth ofi1 the Sons of a l - ~ h r i i . For I mentioned a
woman of theirs (of l1 them), that l3 I should marry
her; then he said, "Oi4 Prince! [There is] no good.15

1 3 91 a 2 5 100 b 5npel.E alone. 3 imperf. 4 with suffix.

,E
5 . 6 3 7 3 b . 751. sdualsnffix. 9 3 . IQ?&,>.

1 . 12 g 76 C l3 4. 14 61. 1' 5 81 b.
 Chrestomathia B. 103

for thee in her." So I said, ':And why [not]?". He

said, "I saw a man kissing1 her." So I turned from
her; then t5e young man married her. So I re-
proached him and said, "Didst thou n o t q n f o r m me
that thou3 hadst seen a man kissing her?" He said,
.'Yes, I saw her father kissing her."
136. Al-Dahh&k the son of Muz&bim said to a
Christian, "[How would it be] i f 4 thou wert to become
a Muslim?" He said, "I have not5 ceased lovingG
Islbm, except thati my love for wine-revents me
from it." So he said, "Become a Muslim and drink
it!" So after h e had become a Muslim, he said t o
him, UThouhastg become a Muslim, so if thou drink
itlo, we shall chastise thee; and if thou apostatize,
we shall kill thee, so choose for thyself". Then he
chose Islbm and his Islgm was good. So he had taken1'
him by stratagem.
137. A Bedouin stole a purse i n which (it) [were]
pieces of money1\ thereupon he entered the mosque
to pray13; and his name wasi4 Moses. Then the
le?der of prayer recited, "And what is thati5 ini6 thy
-

l imperf. 2~f $ 76 c. 35<.G

with suff. 4 g5 102.
5 L with perf. 6 5 81 a, with iudeterm. part. 5 87 rem. 7 5 95 b.
with foll. verbal sentence. 8 5 87. 9 5 73 e. 10 5 102. 11 perf.
12 indeterm. 13 5 74b. 14 61% 15 fem. 16y
right hand, Oh 310sesi'!" So he said, "B1 God, verilx
thou [art] an enchanter!? Thereupon he threw away
the purse and went out.
138. A man claimed the (a) gift of prophecy ir,
the da3s2 of al-Raiid. So after he had appeared
before him [the Caliph], he asked him, W h a t [is
that] which is said of thee?" He said, "that I%m a
noble prophet." He asked, "But n.hat4 indicates the
truth of thy claim?" He said, "Demand ~vhat"thou
wilt:-1, . He said, "I wish thati thou make these'
beardless slaves, [who are] ~ t a n d i n g '[there]
~ this
moment1" [to be furnished] with beards!ll" Then he
looked down for a while1', thereupon he raised his
head and said, "How is i t lawful that I make these
beardless [ones to be furnished] with beardsx1
alter these5 beautiful14 forms? but15 I will make the
bearded ones (owners of beards) beardless in one
twinkling." So al-RaQfd laughed a t him and par-
doned him and cornlnanded a present [to be given]
to him.

C =S
1 Sura 20, 18. 82 a. 3 5 71 c. 4 3 3 31. 5 5 c.
6 perf. 102. 6. 8 5 62, 84a, rem. 9detkrm. 5 86 a.
10 5 2 4 a. 11 indeterm. 12 5 82 a. 13 plur. 14 8 62.
15 GJj.
 C'hrestomathia B. .l05

139. A person pretended to prophecy'; then they

besought of him i n q h e presence of al-Ma'mi~n a
miracle. So he said, "I will cast for you a pebble into
the water, then it will dissolve". He [al-Ma7mhn] said,
"We are3 content." So he brought out a pebble
[which he had] along k i t h him, then cast i t into the
water; then it dissolved. So they said, "This' is a
trick; however, we will give5 thee a pebble of our
own", and let it dissolve!'" Then he said, "Ye are
notS more il1ustrious"han Pharao and I am not
(and not 11°) mightier in wisdomll than Moses, and
Pharao did not1? say to Moses, 'I am not1" content
with what thou doestll with thy staff, so that1' I
will give thee a staff of my own1" which" thou shalt
make [into] a serpent."' So al-Ma'miin laughed and
let him pass on.
140. I t is saidl"hat
AbhDu12ma1' the poet was
standing'" before al-SaffLl? on2' a certain day (a
certain one of the days). Then he said to him, "Ask
of me what thou dost want (thy want)!" So AbB

1 3 21. 2 9 3 5 7 3 c. 4 5 93 c. 5 imperf. G 2.
i imperf. 2
' 5 81 a. 9 5 47 e. 10 pronoun. 11 5 82 c.
12 $6 c. 13 5 76 c, 7 3 c. 14 8 99 c. 15 with subj.
16 G. 11 5 99 b, c. ' 18 5 7 3 C. 19 3 95. 20 wit11
part. 81 a. 21 Q.
106 Chrestornathia B.

Dultima said to him, "1 want a hunting-dog." So he

said, "Give ye i t 1 to him!" Then he said,."And I want
a horse, on%hich I may go forth t o hunt." He
said, "Give ye it to him!" He said, "And a page2, who4
will lead the dog and hunt with him." He said, %nd
give ye him a page!" He said, "And a slave-girl'?
who-' will prepare the game and give us t o eat of it."
He said, UGive ye him a slave-girl!" He said, "These,
0 Prince of the Believers! have need of ([there is]
no5 escape for them from) a dwelling, whichGthey may
inhabit." So he said, "Give ye him a dwelling, which6
will contain them!" He said, "And if they have not
(and if not isi to them) an estate, then wherefrom shall
they live?" He said, "I grantS thee ten cultivatedg
estates and ten waste estates '." He said, "And what
[are] the wasteg [ones] 0 Prince of the Believers?"
He said, "In whichi0 [there are] no plants1'." He said,
"Is grant thee, 0 Prince of the Believers, a hundred"
waste estates ofi3 the deserts of the Sons of Asad."
Then he laughed a t him and said, "Make themt4 all
of them '%cultivated !l4 "
m

1 with 3,which riands last, 5 46 b. 2 aecus. 3 '2j:fter

theverb)§ggb,c. 4599b. 558lb. G§99b,c. is?.
5 73 c with 3. 9 62. 10 and prep. with pronoun a t the
end of the sentence. 11 5 S 1 b. 12 67 C. 13 3. 14 fem. sing.
 Chrestomathia B. 107

141. I t is related1, that Haran al-Raitd had (that

to H. was') a black slave-girl, of ugly mien3. Now
he scattered one day gold-pieces4 among (between)
the slave-girls; so the slave-girls set about5 gather-
ing6 up the gold-pieces, whilsti that slave-girl stood
still, lookingS a t the face of al-Ragid. Some one
asked (it was asked), "Dost t h o u h o t pick up the
gold-pieces?" Then she said, "Verily whati0 they
seek [are] the gold-pieces, but (and) whati0 I seek
[is] the owner of the gold-pieces." Then her speech
pleased him; so he placed her near [to him] and
brought good upon her. Then the report got to the
grandees, thati1 Haran al-Ragid was enamoured l2 of
a black slave-girl. So after that had come to his
knowledge, he sent after the whole of the grandees,
until he had assembled them in his presence13. Then
after he had commanded the bringing ini4 of the
slave-girls, he gave every one ofi5 them a goblet ofi5
chrysolitei6 and commanded it to be thrown down14.
But they declined [doing it] in a body (as a wholei7).
Then the turn came to (the affair got to) the ugly
0 >==E
. 1 5 73 c. 2 J &U bJ\
0
95 b. 3 88 d. 4 indeterm.

5 5 9 1 a. 6 5 74 C, rem. (iqp. pl. fern.) 7 5100 a with part.

8 5 100 b imp. alone. 9 $7 fern. $0 part. pass. with suffix.
F

1 1 S?. 12imperf. 13 h
0 9
r.=
+. 1 4 with inf. and suff. 15

17 5 S2 b.
0
16 determ.
108 Chrestomathia B.

slave-girl; but she threw down the goblet and broke

it. So they said, "Look l a t t,his girl, her name [is]
ugly, and her manner [is] ugly, and her action [is]
ugly. Then said to her the Caliph, "Why then didst
thou b r e a k q t ?" Then she said, "Thou didst%ommand
me to break i t J : so I was of upinion t h a t 5 in its
being broken [lay] a detriment5 wit,h regard to the
treasure of tlie Caliph? and in its not being broken
(in the lack of its being broken) a detriment:' with re-
gard to his command: and the detriment with regard
to the first is fitter to keep intactf' the inviolability
of the command of the Caliph. And I was of opinion
that' in its being broken [laj] my being qualifieds
a s 5 a (the) crazy [one], and in keeping i t intact my
being q u a l i f i e d b s ~a (the) disobedient [one]; and the
first [is] more agreeable to me than the second." Then
the grandees found'" that l' to be beautiful of'? heF
and praised her for':' i t and excused the Caliph for1"
loving her. And God knows best ([is] most knowing).

1 2nd. pers. fern. perf. 5 45. 3 5 73 e. 4

plur. 2 with iilf.
95 a 6 id. with following J 27. i
5 82 c, indeterm. 0
S\.
./S

8 34 +em. . 9 +X '0 5 91 a. 11 a t the end. 12 L?.

13 1A &. ,
0
GLOSSARY.
5
l part. interr. often in the l , &5 because of.
/ ,

first half of an alter- 5 .-E

native question. b t fem. yLlone.

<.S

u t st. c . ~( 5! 65 a) father. &l imp. u take, take

B 5 75

hold of, seize.

voc. ++l du. 9tG1 pa-
.S 5

c. U take hold of.

. A G <.B
+L
0
rents.pz. ~I;~ancestors.
toll. fern. camels.
L &l '!&l F F
*
t o execute on a person
the punishment decreed
B -5 by God. YIII make,
A b h , n. of a man.
6 constitute.
>i imp. a not to wish, 5

l V to draw back.
.
d
to refuse. P, -
j l last, second.
&! imp. i (imper. $1 c.
.
U: )
S.
c. acc.
/

to
1 *
X+
9, -0,

.the other, next

4

come, come to. world.

c. U to bring.
. 7 --
i j l fern. +.l
_ U S
other.
IV c. acc. pers. et r. 5 5
to give. ?of
..* leather, esp. tanned.
5
, , y-G:.
:,ijt - v-ater-vessel made the people of the
2- lit
)-
of skins. tribe of Szd.
.
Ijt
'. &E
co,,j. when, if; odv. c>.\ of the tribe of
% r L-j
there! lo! Azd.
y {itlo! therecame..
%
I -
151 N ~ P .then,
,
in this LT 7. to become con-
case. soled, take example by.
Z Y ,-
imp. a to permit. ULO\ Asaph.
U/ 0 .d
I T ' c . cccc. pers. et L, cjK! ass's saddle.
,
r. to inform, apprize. j i T imp- e to eat.
"5
&! p[.
9 .-
&l ear. (e. S except (S 95) ;
5 US, if not (in an oath:
one who chants
the-<all to prayer. only).
9 %,
L district i n South-.
-2 he who; who, which.
Arabia.
5 ,"Z-".
o).Y! Jordan, Jordan ;$thousand.
sfpl.
S ' 0-5

S "5
district.
El, -d
-
l kind of aloes-
v ~ j lfern. earth, land, wood. .I

ground. a god.
S ./.E /

1
G t wood-fretter. ~t J i e t S% X GO^,
/U+
cS,,Arwb,
l woman's n. Allah.
a. t tribe of Azd.
1 q~i
o GO^!
 Glossary A. 113
oZo.c
&.
p r r e p . (5 7 1 b) to, to- wyb yesterday.
* S .
wards, in the direction l y to believe.
of, opposite. S -6
, *I trustworthy.
&$ I"$ OTO-
l command 5. B
.

belongs unto thee.

iljbl a trust com-
05 mitted to one.
prtrt. interr. or, in the ,z-6
second ha7f. o.f an alter-
Umayya, man's name.
&F!
.S
nutive question. bfpron. I.
'B

P':imp. U , c. acc. to direct $5 1 (5 75,96) that (conj.).

one's course by. 1, (5 95) that (conj.).
$5 8 ,G&
?l Pl. w ~ l I
mother. c

ss6
religious corn- cause.
-
that was, be-

munity, peopIe.
G+
(5 102) if.
kfpart. c. sep. 3 as to,
as regards.
E
C)*
t ( 5 95) lo! verily, (often
to be left untrans-
imp. U. c. acc. p. et lated).
r. to order, command, c. ,a% a 5
csjI pron.; fern. ~l, thou.
ctpep.s.to have brought. * 9s
/

, &l I I t o make feminine,

.VIII t o command.
. to imitate women.
command, power; +L
9 0
con. human beings,
thing, affair. mankind.
.ficommander,
S 5

prince. human being.

 116 Glossary A.

imp. r uel
to be distant.
* . imp. n a ppl. :& /
land, village
(p2. coil country).
& odv. afterwards. imp. U,c. ncc. to reach,
prep. after, after arrive at, come to one's
the departure, after knowledge-
the death of .. . . I1 cause t o reach.
a, i

after the - Bilkis, queen of

death of. Sheba.
S
L&
! distant, far off. $ imp. to prove, test.

& one (5 SS b), portion, Pwt- of course, but

piece; some. certainly.
a, I;? (ex G) wherewith?
-
U>
. one an-
other. '/
- & imp. i to build.
& V11 to be necessary. 3-G- inf. building.
& imp. a to remain, re- S U

main over, remain alive. (8 65 b S 60)

son.
JG JST AM ~ e k r ,name
+Xi
/ - 9 0
f thr6e
* of the first Caliph.
years old.
&*imp. i to weep. z ~9
little son.
IV caus.
& on t h e contrary, but. &&(5 65 i) daughter.
/
 Glossary A. 117

&p!. +klgate, door.

S -05
3 prcep. under, under-
S c, S -05
neath.
W ...p. &t house,
room.
>L;; whiteness, white Y 7 " *

colour. " Tadmor,

r 3j' .
Syrla.
Palmyra in

7 fern. 6-6: imp. U to leave be-

white. hind, give up; to make
& med. G I n c . acc.pers. .
a thing to b e . . . and
swear allegiance to. leave i t so.
S 0 S-. 0
med. I V to be fem. U;nine.
clear, evident.
fern. (1 12 c) that.
+
... prep. between.
O r

-..G& &prop.be-
C . U, h&&name of the eoast-
tween the hands of region of South-western
. . ., = before. Arabia.
9 9 0,
name of a castle
"G pl. L&: crown,
in South Arabia.
E diadem.
S 7 -
masc. coffin. ,+Taim, a man's name:
S a,

S' X to be well ar- a imp. u to be settled.

I V t o settle, establish.
ranged, to be in good

r
order.
C
&i al.-T-Ta'labi;n. of a
imp. a, c. acc. follow. man j-427 Hej. (103516).
V111 id. -' imp. ,U to perforate.
 Glossary A.

FJ U.

+S hole, cavity.
1
-G med.
spring.
, to jump up,
,i.b; imp. u to be heavy.
11 et ]'C' caus. + large garment.
SG,

+,
8 , So
weight. &.hp. i to draw, pull.
M imp. a, c. acc. pers. pH.,

V behave proud-
ly, overbearingly.
to lose a child by death, S
(of a mother). ) ChS
- - tyrannical.
S ,, 5, ,, '
bXj fm. a u three. Gab'iel.
. thirteen. +&. T7JII
.b?, G%
0 - / /
/

to draw, pull,
. .
&W, ,/,G
seize. rc
)o,
9. m-
Tuesday. F imp. U
<
to draw, draw
$ ado. then, thereupon. along, drag.
G fernem.... eight- clof9a1
al-Jarriih,
man.
Y G.~.
name
9
& valuable.
S ,.
ee iny- i to run,
I
flow.
**
& X to make an ex- I F caus.
ception. %l~~(8 l64a)
-2fg
<

%*G
praise, fame. slave-girl, girl.

*
S U

@y l r$ Monday.
0.0- rO Y 0,

body-
&! twelve. place, gut; impose
(tribute); devote; begin
5 05,
+F garment. , (5 74 c rem.).
 Glossary A. 119

+ II to dry (act.).
5.

&-belonging to the
G U

/ F

L& imp. u to be thick, demons, demon.

coarse. 56,
5.
&. inp. i to be mighty,
+pl.~& - orchard.
exalted. >L; side.
skin, hide. 2
. S * ',S
/ pl. f wing.
'L
Uc"j.; iny. i to sit down. s o 9

A+ pl. o+
8 7 ,

army, body
2PI. seat, of troops.
session, council. 5 7 0 3
U+ Jundub, name of
15;month
g JumBdB. a man.
C? imp. a
/ //

to bring to- p
X / *

V c. J r. to equip,
gether, assemble.
0r
prepare oneself for.
c. 2 &g to summon
imp. a to be igno-
both together t o his ,
presence. rant.
55
VIII to be assembled, -.-
iidsaI; time of ig-
to come together.
5 norance, paganism.
G& union.
- ,U* &
WC. ucc. p r sl
. et J\r.
:
d t~9Friday. S

5. /.
LL~L++ a number.
to give answer, ear, t o
consent, t o comply with
beauty, elegance. anyone's desire.
U
S */
colt. demons. answer.
 120 Glossary A.

;
I;med.
ous.
, to be gener- in order that; so?ae-
f i ? ~ ~ etos be translated
.. ;
.
0

I;to be a t finally.
C -
imp. U to make the
the last gasp.
S 7 q i l g r i m a g e to Mecca.
inf., beneficence,
3-
generosity.
G
)'G med., c. acc. to go pilgrimage to Mecca.
S -
U 9
past, pass, go by, %+L good reason,
exceed. ground of excuse.
SE.
ijp inside, centre. &,;\I curtain.
9-0, Y I.

pl.fl!,+ jewel. S . , coll. stones.

- ' S S 9 ,

& med. g, C. to pZ. ordinance,

come. legal punishment.
8 0.
B
$+. army. 3
E;/

1 smith.
~
IT.' to love, wish. /

z 9 e& 11 c. acc. pers. t o

love. inform, relate, tell.
B/*
g- pl. &sort of hand- T' to talk, to con-
some wide garment. verse.
S
S 0 ,

prison. W.&. story, rela-

L rope.
tion; oral tradition of
the Prophet's sayings,
+ C/
until; so that; tradition.
 Glossary A. 121

75.3 U,
3; imp. u t o let flow al-Muharram,
1 ?'
(run) down. the first month.
;L inf. G

r
'
-
im]~.U to cut off.
L+&
O e,
war, battle. -,
t o be troubled, dis-
' S O ,
+FHarb, name of -tressed, sad.
a man.
IF' to trouble, dis-
Gl+Cnicheinmosque, tress.
place of the imkm. -
k"c"l imp. i,
C

c. 2 ucc. to
j d i al-HMt,
C
name of think (it) to be.
a man. 1 P to do well, to
GIP guard,
p /
5
Gpl. know well.
"7-
guardian. 5 ,, elat. &A7
I1 to set in motion, beautiful, good.
i'
shake.
.Yr
al-Hasan;
imp.
ri' forbidden c. be proper name of a man ;
to, unlawful son of the caliph
for. 'Ali.
11 to declare to be for- S O Y

.bidden, unlawful. beauty.

S-.
S. r
sacred territory, ,&.a C0ll. followers, Ser-
v=-
district of the temple vants.
-
a t Mecca. e C

imp. i vel U t o
SCO 9 5.9
i t o p pl. W oman. pelt with small stones.
122 Glossary A.

5 0 5 ¶ Y 5 S,
pl. C;1,- fortress, box.
castle. @+. -1 C
5
elat.
c / -5
C. +
<
9
coll. small stones, r. worthy.

.I/
pebbles. F inq. to decide,
U
p imp. U, c. ace. pers. give judgment.
S
to be there, to be &.& wisdom.
present. C1

ITr to bring in, cause 3; imp. U to loose, unbind.

to be present. I T ' to declare lawful,
7111c. ace. approach to permit.
55
anyone, of death. p. hand-
pass. to be a t the point some wide garment. .
of death.
F imp. i to dig, dig out. & imp. i to swear.
N to shave, shear.
VIII idem.
21;
1*
hobf. praise, thanks.
S / ¶
5:-
H a f ~man's
, name.
&.S- Muhammed (the
praised one.)
&
j imp. u t o take care
of, guard.
+-
8 .

7 c0
ass.

VIIIc. Ur. take heed.

p Himyar, a people
b
..
, in South Arabia.
truth, certainty;
due, right, appointed {
/
O.-S

L writing
portion. of k e Himyarites.
 Glossary A. 123

..-
Y C
Homs (Emesa), &L pt. r;t
S&,&

a town in Syria. W all.

imp. i to take up, &. med. , to pass by,

carry; to carry off; to pass over one.
bear. year.
c. ucc. pers. et &
r. to mount anyone on;
Jgp r ~ p .around.
z

3," 5
to incite to. JF 1 squinting.
S
inf. carrying.
& when; if.
a-;
S

-; care for the de- imp. G-

E ,
veZ
fence of right, indigna- to live.
S I , to bring to life.
IV
tion.
S 0 1 3
Hunain, valley and X,.+ life, life-time.
hamlet near Mecca. y
.zC
I P c. acc. pers. et i ,
.
med., V111 c. J! to r. t o tell, inform, re-
E want, have need of. <

late.
&;I. want, need; V111 to prove, test.
what one has need of. Fp L I L t j !
S., S .O 5
story,
'' dcT
elat. more in account, report.
need (of). p imp. i to make bread,
bake.
$G med.
to surround,
)
.
IY c. 9 r.
com- 9so '
bread, loaf.
prehend, discover.
C- -
,AL imp. i to seal. '
 56 I

inf. sealing up. poll-tax of fiee non-

.j ., 3luslims.
seal.
S >I

EJF inf. going

7,- 01,
&L+ Haitama, name
of a woman. forth; appearance (of
G ,
a prophet).
d imp. U to dig, dig
a 'pit.
-
;$ nom.unit. g
S,.
j
,
p small

G /
g inf.
,
. shell, jewel.
deception. PI11 to draw the
'-lr
sword from the scab-
;d.&. CON. servants. bard.
S ,/*

r3- 1 servant. "p to get a hole in it,

S- U be cleft.
iLO+ service, per-
"jL treasurer.
u
formance of service. ". ,
+rough, coarse.
F imp. i to throw one- SI0 9
self down, fall. verdure, veget-
&. imp.
/ C r

u to go out, ables.
go forth; depart; to $inip. a bow down.
come, come out (into G writing, charactel;
public).
IV to draw out, drive imp. u, c. acc. to
0.ut. woo, demand i n mar-
X to bring out. riage.
-5 ,*
1 - tax on a slave, 2.L
. . inf wooing.
EJ=-
 Glossary A. 125

C.'' al-Ha$tiib, &. people. CON.

a man's name.
G/

imp. i to be light.
+pl. &Ltna-
S O Y 5 - 0 5

tural parts, mental at-

I P to be little bur- tribute.
dened, encumbered.
G. &g worn out.
IF c.
J.i rei to omit,
, imp. u to be empty,
not to do one's duty in
t o be past (of time).
a thing.
S
@L
H&lid, man's name. G FIII to be, become
fermented, mature.
11 to let go free, to $0-

let in. )+i fern. fermented

5 infi removal, depo-

sition. ~
S
drink, wine.
0 -
five. j
"

& I1 to leave behind. j;s fifteen.

U11 to be different, - 9 0:
fifty.
to differ in opinion,
disagree.
gL.
S .
five hnn-
dred.
X c. & to appoint
...-
. - I 1 to make effem-
as successor, as Caliph, W

over. inate, soft.

& p r q ; behind. F dagger.
S. 0.

of a Caliph.
JL med.
through.
, t o wade
126 Glossary A.

ih
/ /

(pro v )imp. a
/

/
/

&.I;
S
/ inside, inter-
to fear. nal.
5,.
j+ fear. 27 S, Y
3 coll. (nom. unit. f 3 )
) )
med. G F-111 choose, pearl.
)

*
choose for oneself.
S'-
(eZai. id.) good;
prosper it^.
!p imp.
d*;
a to push away,
avert (a punishment).
IP to reach, over-
G thread. 1
take, come upon.
coli. horses.
S/ /,
dLc; phantom, spec-
P;silver.
o drachma, piece of

tral visioa /

eja imp. i to know.

I T ' caus.

.
&G phantasmago- G; imp. U to call, call in,
name.
ria.
c.Jl to invite, call
SC'
QlapZ. Us;
&
beast ofbur- upon, request.
/

den; animal for riding. c. U to call upon.

S, 7 S O 7 ,
po, a hinder-part. 1 ~ y c claim.
3 C

E
S

/ /, .
Go brocade. 2;irnp.ato push,repulse ;
&a c. &
to come upon; to give; deliver up.
to go into.
L
2;inf. defending,
IP to bring in, insert. defence.
 Glossary A. 127

3 3
..imp. i to bury. ling, house, mansion,
8 - O ,
place of bur- court.
/

ial. 1;!3 med. to continue.

111 to continue, keep
2; m . U, c. . to & on doing anything.
direct, lead, indicate, / '
guide to. U>a prcq. on this side of,
, 5. below; with the excep-
C,- .
Ji, to prove tion of, except.
by means of a valid
q,a & idem.
argument. B
k . 3 cock.
. c. & guide, 8

sign, indication. &..o religion.

. /

L a imp- 1.
U, c. & to ap-
B
b
0

3denarius, gold-piece.
.
.
l5 pron. (5 12 a) this.
+.

proach, come near to.

t5 G ( 5 14) what?
G; .oZ
fem. (mmc. >at) /.:i, imp. a to cut i n
world ; earthly things;
qieces.
earthly possessions. S,*'
' , 2L b offspring.
S
. 3,3 nom.unit. $ 3 . 3 worm.
B,
-2
9,
I 5 ell, cubit.
7 b not.) pro- &l.

)l;
nounce dZiidu David.
l V to turn oneself, go
F-:member,
imp.
3 c. to re-
U, acc.
think of;
round, to make to fly. mention, name.
8' S '
)fa pL dwel- G$ r,.memory.
128 Glossary A.

:3 I?. to humble, abase, e)

leader.
S P/

crush to earth.
V to submit, hum- CS)
7- imp. ./to see, to
look at, be of opinion,
ble oneself.
55 P"
sc 5
'?! hum-
believe, judge t o be
right, c. 2 act. grid
bled. anything to be.
fern. i.kpron. (g 12 c) I P C .2 acc. ~i;
show.
S 8. 6)
that. insight, advice.
.I' '-
Yto be excited, dis- +I ' Lord, God.
I"jcontented with oneself. S - Rabic,
r, / r C) name of a
4j tail. month.
;;b3 imp. a to go, go s.05
I fern. I four.
a
FJ._O+

away ; condnct oneself. )

W) dirty.
.
C.

opinion.
T- to hold an
C)imp. i to turn back,
S c c return, t o answer.
+&A gold- 5,
S Y ,
d b course, man-
&) fem. /
foot, leg.
ner of acting. &j p ~ . man.
,6 fm.&lS 9 6
! m. & . j T m e ~ s saddle.
p ~ . ~ , c.
(S 65 ;88b) owner of.. .,
possessor of . . ., fern. -- -) travelling, jour-
affair. of. . . ney.
/

pers.
SE*
U")
I head (also fern.). e)h p . a, c. ace.
 Glossary A. 129
..
A

to have pity on i>, inf. giving back,

1
anyone. sending back,returniig.
S .
../
"-) imp. U to give, do-
compassionate,
)?+l
nate, grant, endow.
merciful. So
9 ' 0 5 . " j i sustenance, food.
the Compas-
sionate, i. e. God. J--) IV to send.
.'r
&)fem. mill.
0 9
.
JY 1 pl.
599
messenger.
",CJro - . .I1 to- set (of jewels).
+'G=-)
the mill P)
of -battle, the thick imp. U, c. ace. to be
of the 6ght. content, to acquiesce,
9 . .. to be pleased. at.
zj-, vez 3) to 'be lax. .
IV to make lax, to
,or ,L
aUt
n,

2; may
let hang down. . God be pleased with

+;gentle, soft (of

S-- him.
0
ilka
.",inf. satisfac-
the wind).
tion, pleasure.
21 imp. u to bring back.
$ YIII to tremble,
VIII to turn back, quake.
.to turn.
.,. 8)imp. a guard, tend.
r /

G,,,' B

. 1 - 1- herdsman, pastor.
&p, r

before thou
hast -given a single
5,
%G)
.
coZZ. . subjects,
look. people.
Ii
130 Glossary A.

S
4; inq. a to desire ea- f;ij single act of boa-
gerly; c. & . to cease ing in prayer. (For
desiring, to abstain every prayer there are
from. appointed a certain
r/
fixed number of bow-
imp. a to raise up,
ing~.)
raise (voice); to take
S,o,
up, lift, take away, water-vessel made
put away, remove. of leather.
VIII to rise, rise up, -
q j pl. I;q cistern
8

soar aloft; to go up, con-

to be high, valuable; taining water.
to be advanced (of a .
a

=
a
),, imp. i, c. ur. to throw,
day). ,
throw at, pelt.
i q . u to sleep.
)
V to reel, stagger.
S,
g&
1
o/
sleep. C)
5 -
/C r

11 mend, patch. F)cloud of dust.

/ /

Rukayya, woman's n. b1)med., to dung.

1 S U

<j imp. a, c. acc. to (pro fern., PZ.

mount a horse, ride. :&2 wind.
$l; coll. b e a s t for &) med.) IVc.acc. to wish,
ridini. want, intend.
r

d j imp. U to gallop.
/
- /

&p. u to turn away,

 Glossary A. 131
5r
to turn this way and 3- imp. u to conduct a
1
that, bride to the house of
..
6,)imp. i to transmit, re- her husband.
*.
late (of a tradition). IV c. to deter-
. .imp. a to quench mine, resolve upon do-
therthirst. ing a thing.
S ,-
8 . ~ ; r time,
~ j reign.
quenching the
thirst (of water). by
-1
imp. a to abstain,
S/
&lj2 tradition, re- shun, abhor. II caus.
S 07

port. Uj temperance, ab-

5 97
stinence.
)yj Holy writ, orig. the
Book of Psalms.
temperate, dispas-
S glass, piece of glass.
E -S1. ,Y
sionate.
+.k. id. nom. un. imp. a to come to
/..imp. U
1
to chide, re- nought.
S -. )
prove, reprimand,, re-
uts") coming to
buke. nought.

rL
' ..2 crowd, crush. 6:
)
imp. u to shoot up,
thrive well, attain full
saffron. growth.
-*/
e j PZ. &Ljspokes-
9 9 ,,ua c
+,+l al-Zauba'a, name
man, chieftain. o? a demon.
W
132 Glossary A.

c)1.et1>
1 c. 2 ace. vel c. ace.
to marry (act.) ;
' fr med.
U)
11 to make a
thing seem good to
c. ace. t o marry (neut.) anyone.
V c. acc. refl.
S / .a
j:+ wife.
$; med. ) imp. u to visit.

Jb..med. imp. a (c. ucc.)

) -5
3 imp. a, c. 2 ucc. to ask
- to cease (being any-
anyone for.
thing; esp. negatively).
S c. acc. pers. et &
Jr,i
_/

inf. mid-day, to ask after.

noon or afternoon.

-
BE,
..e
3tY inf. question.
V L;? et ,sz.rj' (ex G.

&;g) to assume the

imp.
/ /
U t o revile.
g;ise of, to' dress one- cause, reason.
self. 8,

4
*/
appearance, dress.
Sheba, town and dis-
trict in South Arabia.

-21
p cor- p
So,
fem. +.,
S.',/
seven.
ner. B7/

. #
P p L- , bekit
OF med. imp. i, c. 2 ace. ' of prey.
)
t o give more, add to.
S masc. vel fern. way,
33.9inf. increase.
. right wag.
 Glossary A. 133
B CJ ;. G,
&S fem. iii+ six. "ix
Y
navel.
." S ,
sixty. iir throne.
/-,

L imp. U, vel i to hide.

G 0 -
i Ci"
r J r Sadme.
imp. U , c. J, 17 to hurry, be i n
to
prostrate oneself,npoa-
'
7 hurry
XUVE~V.
0
2 em. $5
0 Y Y
a-, inf. prostra- quick, swift.
tion, bowing down. % Sid, man's name.
.Wmosque. LCPZ.&+I$fore-
arm.
gaoler-
enchantment.
&.& Sacid, name of
man.
the time before C.
ey..dt
j 0.0,
al-~as'iidi,
daybreak.
name of a man. Au-
Ir to make subserv- thor of various histor-
,
ient, subdue. ical , works, -f 345
G or 346 A. Hej. (956
&, imp. u to stop up, or 957 A. D.).
obstruct. -
G S

imp. U , c. acc. to rejoice,

;k; IQto remove some-,
7"give pleasure to. thing which is in front
of another thing.
0

&L
4
S ,c S
. Y
" pl. fY!secret. elaf. &L,j low.
F 1
134 Glossary A.

g Sufyhn,
U' name go in or through, in-
of a man. sert, pierce through.
& c. 2
iimp i, UCC. to I1 to grant safety,
give to drink. prosperity.
I B c. 2 acc. id., to IV c. &
*
to declare
serve wine to.
oneselfresignedto God;
fiimp.a to be, become t o become a Muslim.
drunk.

c)
{F drunk.
B
immunity, wel-
fare, safety.
&,imp. u to dwell, in- Y / " -

SalmStn, name
habit.
of a man,
/ .poor. U&
Y .U->
Solomon.
&name of s. castle
in South Arabia.
iLj (inf.I Q IsIiim.
G,
imp. ZL to put poison
i?j, 11 to appoint as
in, to poison.
ruler. W /

U'U might, role, -- poison.

power; plausible ex- LLinf. munificence.
cnse, plea. &, i m ~ .a to hear.
L-
C

&.L imp. u to enter, trav-

coll. fish.
el along in; c. acc. obj.
et jloci vel c. acc. 063.. L 11 c. 2 acc. ve2 c. acc.
'

et V instr. t o make t o .
et c-, to call, name.
 Glossary A. 135

?-G
heaven. ;2 evil, wickedness,

S
W
G! name.
injury.
9 / 0 5
ay! fem. day
-.o /

black,
tooth, age. dark-coloured.
BCy S '9 S, 5
Lpl. c;);~" ordinance, pl.lia,Lf house-
institution , tradi- utensils./
5.".
tion.
&LIV to support; to S . ,
L+!,
.
lord, master.

authenticate a tradi- P
l gZ.)? L? bracelet.
8 U /
tion of Mubammed by lo2" whip.
adducing an unbroken 0& ,
l;;.hour, while.
series of the persons G -

who have handed it &U! now, a t once:

S
down. fern. calf of leg.
S , 5 / " B
5-07 ",.,,,pl. "lyl mar-
C)C;L*HX) propped up,
ket, street.
name of the Himyaritic
V111 to be uniform,
writing.
equal.
S,.
h p l . norn. &, (5 53 b ;
1 med. 6 imp. i to trav-
65 m) year. el, journey, go on.
5.
&hail, the star i i course
~ of life,
Canopus. conduct.
SEmed. ,
to be evil.
IT to make evil.
S

journey.
inf. travelling,
136 Glossary A.

x
vspace traversed
S/ /
S
+If,
.- wine, strong
in journeying. drink.
svord. "r".
-7 -
- IT' to be high, pro-
mnent.
.sheep.
Syria.
F
ce,+jpl. j\
-
*>!high-
0 - 0 5 .
r"
X+ II to compare. born; nobel, eminent.
I F to resemble. /

Tm to buy, pur-

resemble
.,
r' c. U to seek to
to imi- 7- 0 7
chase for (&A). /

iiui;; Shuiba, man's name.

tate.
. F nom.
S%-- S/ S.
+ nom.
S .
unit. 6
S/.
y
F barley.
S -
unit. b y hair.

tree, shrub.
>

imp. a to gaze
).
F!
05

fern. &!?hairy,
o. - -
fixedly at, to go forth, having much hair.

G.
travel. & i
VIII c. U
,
to occu-
imp. U to tie, bind py oneself, be occupied
fast. with.
F imp. to thank, to
S 1 .
d
elat. a
C
strong; vehement, ener- be thankful.
5 .
getic; powerful.
9 (elat. id.) bad.
a imp. c. At.et U, ace.
to complain to one per-
C

*- imp. a to drink. son of another.

"C.,
+pinf. drinking. .- em. sun.
f-
 Glossary A. 137
C

. VIII wrap oneself in. i 1- L L form, appear-

c. &
to wrap one's ance.
-.nzed. 6 imp. a t o will,
garments over.
kind of shirt, wish.
large wrapper. '-3
thing, something.
left. o k med. 6 I1 to plaster
5"
shame, disgrace. over, to build high.
)So. g 9 7
&i.
..
pl.
& ear-ring.
S
c;,h
- 0 .

.. p1. .. .. &&
.G dev-
3,gi;; imp. a to give tes- il, Satan.
,
timony, to testify; iG med. 6 to spread,
c. & to convince
5.
become known.
. S
oneself as t o ;
c. ucc.pers. to be with
A
. . l . v.A nature,in-
nate disposition, hab-
anyone. it.
III C. acc. t o see, m.
+,a imp. U to pour, pour
be an eye-witness.
5
*L.&
.pl. S
a+
7 7
wit-
out.
l .
u ~ r ,inf. pouring.

a
ness.
S. .. ...
g a b testimony. IV t o rise early;
c e n t e r upon the time
9 pl. +1
SO. S 9 05
month.
of the early morning.
med., IV c. p. & 5 0 9

t o g i ~ eanyone good ad- daybreak.

5 , M

vice.
cL+ early morning.
138 Glossary A.
S / *r r 7 U. -*/
Z ~ + C U dyed garment. t2iX.o 5
to re- f3
@ right, true. ject the good advice
of a person.
2t o be a companion. . . C

X take as companion. "&a imp. U t o speak the

truth.
2Gr ad-
&.G~z. 5 0

inf. truth, ve-

herent; friend, compan-
ion; lord; man, owner racity.
of. .(cfr. 5 S8b). p -imp. to tie up,
u
@ tar- bind, collect.
FJG? 5-7
gatherer. pl. )ro purse.
&Grthe
udj= b.
I ..C

relaters of traditions. __
cy
.. - leaf.
S, imp. u to call out,
&
call loudly.
S o.
court, court-yard. -
i g stone. vy imp. i to turn away,
remove, depose.
p& Sahr,
a man.
name of S, _ inf.
6 .
&a imp. u to turn away UTTI c. pers. io
from, alienate. go away from, to
go/ g , , leave.
1 pl.
1)&a breast, the
front p a r t , place of '
cjz Sirwzh, name of a
honour. w t l e in South Arabia.
 .. S ,
imp. a, c. acc. to %G, prayer.

,' -
go up, ascend. -+
#
5-10.
imp. a t o make, fab-
ciko imp. U , to be small,
r

covered with ignominy. ricate, construct.

5 - elat. ?l,- 035
-/U - Sad%, large
small,
town in Yemen.
young. S / - 0

VIJ to stand, place iisi-&p~-&L*cast~e.

S 0 -

themselves in a row. V* voice.

3.
crispl. V+
S 9 ,

row. 2~, figure, form.

S./

5 : 0 6
W,& wool.
yellow.
9 Zr ,
Q9+ Sepphoris,
cL.2
H mecl. cS
shout, scold.
to cry,
town in Galilee.
& proper name of c L in6
---
scolding.
crying,
a man (chosen, elect).
& imp. i to crucify, j1.L riled. 6,c. acc. to be-

eoz. to have crucified.

u to be good,
come.
I1 to make to become;
to make to be, to have
S - brought.
D
I V c. ucc. pers. t o
make to thrive. - .. sword-
C.& to p u t in bet- cutler, sword-polisher.

L
ter order, condition.
II to pray.
F 7111to lie on one's
side.
140 Glossary A.
S,
;t$ inzp. i to beat, strike wv;, manner of
off, sprinkle. acting.
.'SO-= C r

g +> he '?L& food, dish, meal.

threw him to theground eating, food.
I

+,ysort, kind-
50'
&& imp. vela to smite,
U
' / L
single act of to give anyone a blow
striking.
- or thrust.
S/*,
5 C

inq. rc to conjoin && blow, thrust.

with, associate with. 3imp. ,to seek.
iG med. to perish, c.&*pers. to ask ang-
get lost: one for, demand.
' / a .
-X+ pl. $&g estate, a& /;c
Abii ?%lib,
country-place. name of a man.
d.&/
b L b to lower. p i m p . G to rise (of the
Tiberias. sun).
. &
p imp.u, c. ncc. opi.et . VIIIc.
see.
to look at,

mater. to press upon.

& FTI to go awa3-,
;;\i,imp. n to grind. depart. *
sp!ook, glance. open, pleas-
&& portion, end. ant.
--
$$&nickname of s . &A.!c
S
divorce from
man (the elegant one). a wife.
 Glossary A. 141

, j rei to
i ~ . r r c. imp. i to fold, con-
covet, strive after, de- ceal.

1.&
sire eagerly.. filed. 6 t o fly.
:j.$& water-vessel made p pl.&.,; bird (sin-
of leather (for ab- g u l a r also coll.).
lutions). IV to shade.
time, state, measure, p imp. i to treat un-
limit. justly, injure.

-€ med. ,
to obey, to +L imp. a to appear, to
be complaisant. come to light.
IV id. I T 7 to make to appear.
5
obedience, back, upper
submissiveness. portion.
ti -0 Z
.
"1- neck- imp. U to pray .to,
lace. worship, adore.
S, .
ii;;Lb power, ability
9,-
slave, servant.
L & Y

t o do anything. . _&I 'Abdallah,

J& med. ,
IV to make
name of a man ,(wor-
shipper of Allah).
long, 'to remain a long
time at. &L& worship.
&
; length, extent
'
Z
r 0.3
i... u 'Ubaida, name
in point of length. of a.mali.
142 Glossary A.

vwl al-'Abbls,
9
name f& V' c. ucc. to go be-
of a man. yond, exceed.
FJ -,, 8 9 , -,us
mantle. ,3cc pl. BIAS! enemy.
M < ,
S 0

nobility, rank. + 3 s I I t o punish, torture.

S t punishment,
&freed,noble,old. to;ture.
'6
U
-
an, name of a& imp. u vel i to blame.
a man. coll. Arabs.
4 imp. a> c. &, tobe
.astonished at. -'dlyI 3
Bedouin.
,*E

so,
2wonderful, as-
,
$
S
, throne, a throne with
a canopy over it.
tonishing. .,&
S

...,
. *l. 2-G won- &p imp. i, c. J pers. /
to
come across, occur,
.derful thing, marvel.
5 , - happen.
+
C
,, coll. barbarians, esp.
c. &L to offer t o any-
Persians.
one, propose.
imp. i t o knead. V to advance towards.
%dough. $J;breadth, exteat
& X c. J to .make one- as to breadth.
self. ready, to prepare "M " /

oneself. f J = cypresses.
S c; $2 imp. i to perceive,
X+ number. ,
know.
 Glossary A. 143
8 0 7 s.05 5,
up p l d ty t comb i+
/

tribe, kins-
on the head of a bird. folk.
S ,
-;f chief, prince.
-. 7
t>+l& 'Ashiira, fes-
.
G>
G,
sweat, perspiration.
tival on the tenth
day of the month
imp. i to be strong, Muharram; orig. the
mighty. Jewish feast of atone-
dFI al-'Uzzg, name
of a goddess of the
ment.
8 - 0 ,
assembly, to-
pre-islamitic Arabs, tality.
esp. of the Horeishites. so,
afternoon, about
G?UQ 7
J , 'Abdul-
0 S
two hours before sun-
' U Z Z ~a, man's name. set; generation, age.

inf. deposition, re-

G stick, staff.
moval. imp. i,c. acc. t o re-
,
. imp. i,
,y A

c. & to
bel against, disobey.
eom ,'=
@W1jl ~ b u - l - b ~ i
decide, to resolve upon
anything. a, man's name.

E. army.
&. hp. a to be, be-
come thirsty.
.$.,Z camp.
U?c IV c. 2 acc. t o give.
r;r fern. +X
S 0,

7 O
G.. d

ten.
& elate r.7 great,
twenty.
mighty, glorious.
144 Glossary A.

p vez* (?) proper

I..

III to treat, manage,

name of a bird. e b o u r at, exercise skill
S * upon.
c;c?.fi
.
mon.
evil, clever de-
% big, strong
> =*<
Chc Sffgn, man's name. heathen. .
c]
G imp. r, c. G pers. to
& pl. fodder.
forgive anyone. imp. U to perceive,

-,
._ S / -.
offspring. know.
c. U be cognizant of.
bl?jicr mountain-road,
pass. knowledge; '

Y," 9
-%+C 'Ukba, a man's science.
S
name. ,& sign;
something
a kind of eagle, whereby a thing can
sea-eagle. be recognized.

J.2imp. i ueb & imp. a 2 ~pl.; r b , elut.

-/- 7

to be of sound mind, learned man.

sensible. ?l;
creature.
understanding ;
reason, intelligence.
imp- u to be high. .
c.&.tobehaveproud-
. J
. kAM^, B man's
* ly, insolently to.
name. 575&he struck
kAcco, St. Jean dyAcre. him with the whip.
 Glossary A. 145

F-1to be exalted, esp. imp. a to make, do, .

/

of God. construct.
S p r E p . (5 71b) over, X to employ anyone
on, upon, on the basis, as.. .
ground of, against. pl. 5i;F
work,
-.=&v. U.
,. , -35
deed, action, handicraft;
X*
territory, province.
tC;,( &M5 & jo she
< *

is three days' journey LGpi.

<
admin-
distant. istrator, vice-roy.
i
. & *
'Ali, the fourth
F

Le=
/

imp. u to be, become

Caliph. blind.
?C; elat. &l loud.
. UB
&p ~ ~ from,
p . away
p- inq. U to be,become uni-
from; about, con-
cerning, according
versal, comprehensive.
to.
L1
to be-
imp. i, c.
take oneself to, have
/

F ambergris. [by, in.

recourse to.
.p m p . at, near, with,
y
).3 (

Omar. .
>,p
l - 0

under these
' ~ r n i r ,man's name. circumstances.
(5 65 n)
pron. 'Am-
0

&
from,
run, a man's name. French de chez.
so,
depth, distance to S,, S O Y s.05
the bottom.
W,p p l . &c/ neck.
Kk
146 Glossary A.

5 FJ a*
If med. ) IX to be efern., pl. e
0 ,

FJ
l eye.
crooked. pl.
9 ,
well, spring.
;G imp.a, c. & to re- 1
s V to breakfast, take
turn, to repeat, do an early meal.
S 4

again. fifirs beginning (of a

F J Y
aloes-wood. month).
S.
-
+F *-
imp. U to set, (of
li3L habit, costum,
the sun).
wont, ordinary manner
of acting. I>u l t . , to make a raid,
warlike expedition.
med.) to seek refuge.
imp. i to wash.
X to ask for protec-
J a 9 ,F inf. ablution.
tion; to say: dfb b p ! . 0.
G!>saddle-
C

(Sura 114) ,,I seek p.

/
C

protection by God!" cover.

" :to be choked up.
med. ) X to help
d

oneself, 6 fresh.
C

Muc%wiya,the first 2
. imp. C
a to be, be-
-0mayyad Caliph.
come angry.
(661-79). FJ ..anger, wrath.
5
>Ldisgrace.
C

5 '

. angry.
-. cover, +L
&
l2 'A'iia, woman's n. lid.
.
 Glossary A. 147

..
%ji+ p ~ 6% under- ?
(5 88b with gen.)
r . s o :

r":
other than, beside, ex-
garment.
,. 0s cept; not.
elat. &l conquer- :U U

ing, predominant. F &without.

& darkness
5.0-

of night, indignation.
a t the commencement $H .. a - M U a
of dawn. [ness. man's name.
5 . 0

L& roughness, harsh-

- in an artful,
& II et I P to bolt,
deceitful manner, un-
lock.
S ' ,
awares.
rMr pl. L&: youth, 5conj. (8 71 e ; 104) then,
page, slave.
S./
p COM. sheep. _ and, so.
**
imp. u to open.
imp. a, c. 3
to be c. &
t o open to
rich, not to have need anyone = t o grant him
0f. the victory over .. .
II to sing.
IV to make rich.
key.
p singer.
W Y Y

med. 6 to be absent.
I V c . acc.pers. et jr .
to explain.
.
)
Lt ned. 6 11,c. & to
S,,?
ij+ youthful behav-
alter. iour, levity.
Kk*
14s Glossary A.

FJ.0
i . U to transgress, lij- ' portion, party.
X,.
commit disgraceful S

deeds.
d,]b maker of dis-
2m to give oneself airs
tinciions (Omar).

toward anyone, boast. ;g imp. a to be fright-

>-. imp. i to flee.

I:
ened, afraid, to fear.

;y evil deed.
/

imp. a, c. to
. r. &
,C<

.imp.
,iu to commit
rejoice, be glad.
S-- unlawful acts.
u;j horse, especially of 8 0

pure breed. inf. evil, im-

S<. moral conduct, trans-
L,!$cleverness, in-
gression.
sight. [ian.
5 IV to reveal, divulge,
E?:
h~ e r s i a na, Pers- spread.
S - o>
p I > para-
S G
W silver.
.
,
sang, ab. four miles.
6 9 imp. U, c.
C*

to be emp-
,*
L
..-imp. a, c. >*to
to shame before anyone.
put

ty, to get through with. / M.

V111C. C)r . to wrap a

...
"pimp.u, C.*
.
U.
to sepa- garment around oneself.
rate, distinguish. liberality.
V to be dispersed.
Y111 to be divided,
L'imp. a to do. 5 ,ad
p!. JLj( deed,
split. /
 action, manner of ac- IT7 to come towards,
ting. to come, come along;
G. V to miss, to ask, t o begin.
seek after anyone. X7to be opposite to.
0*
&I p r q . before, ere.
& F11 c. to free
opposing, power
oneself of, get rid of.
of resistance.
tree-
in pres-
fruit. . prep.
s imp. u to make dull,
blunt, to defeat,. con-
ence of.
9
3,-
,.
inf. I acceptance.
9- "E
found (?).
5 c'
~-L;i'~l.LG!
... . man's coat,
Xi such and such a one. wide garment.

l+
7' to understand ; to G::imp. 2~ t o kill.
endeavour to under- 111 c. ucc., to combat
stand, comprehend.
So.
,p, :):,$
S Y
.
0.

,
U
a t . once.
anyone, to fight.
9 0.
&- inf.
ecution.
killing, ex-

a+ ( 5 65 o)
'
mouth.
in, at, with,' a-
. G
.. killed.
-
.prep.
Q
a man's name.
mong; in comparison
with.
g 5 73 e part.
c. Jr r. t o be
9 3j' imp. i,
S* a

F."ave.
J.+ imp. a to accept.
able; to have power to
* do a thing.
150 Glossary A.

r, .
p.&
9

. pl. &L&old,
rr,

IT to apportion to
anyone a fixed meas- ancient, former.
ure, esp. of talents.
IV to establish, con-
W C . t o make & r'firm.
'+C

more powerful than. . . c. L, r. t o confess.

S_ 0 Y
,
might, omni- X to stand, be estab-
potence. lished.
5
)!L+?
C O

measure, due.
;.yGp ~ . glass
1)).
vessel.
S 0-
*/
. sanctuary. I2 imp. a to read, be
able to read.
+p imp. U, c.
.>.
to be
U H ,oa
near, approach.
w3cZL11, the holy I.. (denominative) to
house) sanctuary, tem- offer (a sacrifice).
ple in Jerusalem, Jeru- BC"
i+ 5 water-skin (usu-
salem. 7,
ally made out of a
;& i m p - a , c. & to goat's skin).
advance, arrive, SG"" ' '--L
.yP.&y sac-
come. rifice.
V t o precede, to ad- S 0
vance towards. +.p. c. near.
rjcr
foot. &prelations.
&..
S

i, 7
b p2.
2-0 -
i'
-t. the tribe of Ku-
raish, Kuraishites.
"
0
bty l ear-ring.
/ 0 5

P
'
Glossary A.

sit in judgment; to
execute.
VII to be finished, be
a t an end.
l61

p2. 15f village.

judge.
,.& IV to swear.
S S 0 , imp. a to cut through;
W; story, tale. to decide, determine;
S
butcher, execu- t o pass, pass through.
tioner. imp. u to seat one-
self, to sit.
F
.

imp. i, c. ucc. to
make for, go towards. c. J.lie in wait for.
VIII to acquire, gain,
r""0V1 beto short.
H

make oneself buy.

short, contract one-
self.
med.
a
.
,to lead.
&b leader.
7 7 Or U r r -- to seem
W~~
j& med. ) to say, tell;
mean to oneself. often = to ask.

*'
p .
S
p alace,
9 )
-
c. J to call, name.
5
castle, fortress. J> speech.
S. 0
plate, dish. '6 med.) to stand up, to
G.

& to drop down, get up, to rise.

dart down. (of a bird). IV to establish, main-
*.
&-imp. i to judge, to tain; to accomplish,
 152 Glossary A.

execute; to place one- U I((it is) as if.. .

self, stand, stay, re-
main.
F V to magnify one-
self, be proud.
so
,
.p
lations.
coll. people, re- p. clot. great,

S/
old.
&.gvalue.
S i n z ? . u to write, be
;l&
.being awake; to able to write.
perform one's devotions. + 3 he
S /
,.G place. .
wrote a letter and sent
;ke; to tie up, bind it by them.
(a water-skin) ; .to be
. document,
assembled.
. .to be strong.
~2 letter, book.

I1 to make strong.
29
S

,
.
((C.&)strong, PO be much, abundant.
powerful. I11 to desire much
of anything, to seek to
' SG me& LC V to
surpass anyone.
vomit.
chieftain, king (in
p.elat 7
7
Yemen). (often used as a sub-
stantive in apposition).
d (S 70; 94 b prop. subst.)
similitude, measure, fuse, thus.
like, as.
. -I

u s i m p . i to lie, tell lies.

 Glossary A. 153

, ,

squadron.
c . division, Funbelief.
$imp. i, c. occ. pers. et
F y ~ u r a i z man's
, name. T. t o do a thing in

seat, chair, someone's place.

throne. v . 5 85 b) totality,
before a determ. noun,
c. ncc. pers. et
, all; bef. indet. every.
r. to honour, present
with.
if. liberality, Kalada, name of
generosity. a man.
;,noble. $lime.
G$i&p. a not to like, /

eU.!I,b
. L i d 9

Dii-lkalz, n. of
to rather not do a - a South Arabianprince.
thing.
a i m p . i, c. QS to
U r
,,.X 11 c. acc. pers. to
uncover, lay bare. talk with anyone.
V11 to be uncovered, V to speak, talk.
S..
taken away.
f
W speech, talk.
%gib, name of a min. (4 + L) as, like as.
?equal, of equal birth, J perfection, com-
rank. pleteness.
-

S/ -9
;r;jm?p.u to be ungrateful, ~ W d u s t - h e a ;.pname of
to deny. a part of Kufa.
l54 Glossary A.

S 0'
a;r( quantity. 3 p r ~ p (S. 70 h ; 87)
d
for;
imp. u to give a name indicates the dative ;
of honour to, see the because of, on ac-
foll. .line. count of (end, mo-
S/*' tive) ; in stating dates,
d n a m e of honour,
e- g- & W
O * . . a
title, formed of the
name of a son, with
/.one night .re-
. C + .

?l
prefixed "fathern or maining of (the month)
*mothern. Raiab.
window. J conj. c. subj. ((9 75)
1. 30.
al-Kiifa, town near that, in order that.
the site of ancient G+

Babylon.
U3- (8 95) because.

K, ,
med. (5 81; 97) to
exist, be.
$ not, with the jussive
prohibitive 5 76 b ; with
c. acc.to be something.
the perfect 5 73 d.
The perfect has often
the force of the present.
.prep. c.g. without.
c]
g c. J. circumlocu- '%'B'
tion for "to haven. g# Lu'lu'a, aman'sname
(pearl) .
Lghow?
,j(Q70g; %not.) part. of &- imp. a to remain,
asseveration. tarry.
 ~ ~ o s s a rA.
y 155

in.. U, c. ace. t o I;fiimp. a to meet.

put on (of dress). IF7 c. acc. et 31 to
IV c. 2 ace. t o clothe. throw, hand over to.
/

$ clothing, dress. Y t o come forth to

meet, to meet.
i ; id.~
X to throw oneself
3 id. down, to lie.
3 nom. unit. i j-)
COZZ.,
S, /

(5 76 c) not.
bricks. a conj. after, when.
St.'
bJ sea, lake. 7 part. if, introduces
an improbable condi-
' -..X.\( village in pal- tion.
.med. [blame.
cl1
estine, Legio. , to reproach,
;Q ton,,.
c)
5 med., II t o colour,
variegate.
V1II c. + to be
,
attached to, cleave to.
g: B **S
ppl. d!,jl colour,
kind, species.
'
-.< kind. & (5 42; 81; 93 d) not
3 V111 to turn round. to be, not to exist.
411 c. ace. pers. et U
*
ad i t is not for
to give a nickname, thee, thou must not.
surname to. -,
fibre of the date-
3 nickname. palm.
S'. S. .
At:4 PJ-JL;. (S 65 P) l r ' c . ace. pers. et
,
U

night. r. to help one along

in the same t o with. ..aid with. ..
. S.
town, city.
night.
G p ~ o n . w h a t ?that which;
something which.
G CO?~. (S 101) as Y 9

long as. ! al-RIac15'in7

Ctesiphon on theTigris.
L not (vgl. 93 d). G.
imp. ZL to pass by.
%l+( 5 66) pron. mi.aiun
IF7 to make pass by
hundred.
(brandish).
similitude, the same;
iiy time.
S;;*

one like, as (cfr. +G C

94 b). li5Once.
@
2, ,- 'G7
l i j ~Murra, name of
&+e Rf.agiau, adherent
/ a man and of a tribe.
of the religion of Zoro- cJs/,
li !.Q! woman.
aster. 1 C

5 Y,
C ; l ~carelessness, un- :F l)k E Jmeadow..
~
5 7 ,

3~ 11 to make smooth.
concernedness.
2 imp. u to stretch out. G .imp. a to become sick.
-u.u, 6 , .5 a ,
.. .. 3Ja turn thy
h marble.
eyes. Merwan, name of
 Glossary A. 157

a man, here of the &". II c. acc. pers. e t

Omayyad Caliph, r.
683-685.
Le r. to put in pos-
session of.
musk. /

. % imp. a, c. acc. et
.
G l V to enter upon to fill.
X. ,
the evening; to do any- L coll. aristocracy,
thing late. nobles.

..
evening. & V to flatter, seek
& imp. i to go, go on, to appease.
march.
..
& imp.i to go, go by,
imp. i, c. ace. to
rule, govern, reign.
go away, to have exist- I I t o make king.
S
ed formerly. 0

rule, govern-
S' -
b rain, shower. ment, empire, reign,
J. /
royalty, wealth.
cinprup. with, along with,
spite of. L.property.
I

pl. d& king.

C/

&!A . in addition
C

to that.
+MuCait,man's name.
5 L. queen.
Mecca.
p craft, artfulness.
melik, a man's name,
here of the Omayyad
market-tax. Caliph,reign.685-705.
158 Glossary A.
S'.". Y
&I.@empire, king- cr"yMoses.
/

0
dom.
CI 0 C
J !
S#.S
p J \ ~ propert).,
ex et (55d). possessions.
0 .
who? (5 14); h e who, (5 65 q) water.
5 - 0 .
one who, if anyone. open space.
(5 13; 99; 102). jG 1c.
med. 6 1 io
0-

U'
U J *who can. .me? distinguish between.
I.

prcep. of (something JG med. to decline,

incline, strive towards.
F

of), belonging to ; 5'

.pulpit. ,+
Y

placed after a negative

it increases its force
Munabbib, name of
(S 93 b) ; consisting of;
from, away from (sepa- a man.
ration, starting-point) ; X- portion, choice
with the comparative piece.
"thann; through (tran- %
CAj account, report.
..
sition).
../imp.
p. a to restrain,
hinder. prophet. E

Ss,)
VIlIto defend oneself; X+ prophecy, dignity
refuse, be reluctant. of prophet.
'.
uL m e d . , to die. carpenter.
&G iinf. death. 3unclean, dirty.
 Glossary A. 159
So. SO

&, we-) id- VIII to depart.

F star.
$ imp. i to alight, dis-
mount, to encamp near
g imp. u to become free, (S),
to settle.
to free oneself, escape, S yy

be saved. J,>j inf. alighting,

,

3 imp. u to cut the

encamping, settling.
f; 0 ,

J- - p G drel-
throat, kill.
r"
Fthroat. ling, of resi-
dence; station.
2 pron. we. +-
S
descent, gene-
G V to go aside, to re- alogy.
tire. 8-0 ,
copy, transcript,
SO<
+ direction. list.
2 prq. towards, in S
+vulture.
. , i
0 -

the direction of. '* 5.

L imp.
-.. to be pious,
U

p.&
S Y

/
pt. drink- to perform one's re-
ing-companion. ligious duties con-
1s 111 to call out. scientiously.
- c. acc. to call to. &S religiousness.
al-Mundir, name
G
. pl. &.,Gcer-
>. emony during the pil-
of a man.
ip imp. i to remove, ex-
","
(8 ,
65 fG
grimage.
) women.
tract. ,
160 Glossary A.

pi I F - to spend.
/ C
.

1
&&.j11C . 2 acc. to ad-

C
jure, call upon.
r .
G Nufail, man's name.
+.& imp. u to set up,
e
/

"' inqj. u to pick, pierce.

erect, fix.
S 0 -
r*pj N a ~ r ,man's name.
&L engraver, painter.
-- i~~zp.u to take away,
diminish.
S_ . &' imp. i to reproach a-
..
-bp(.
S..
L

. forelock.
nyone (c. >)with.
,
. &G
U

pi. girdle. C

imp. i to marry.
imp. U to see, look, @rrr to marry.
behold. X id., wish to marry.
c. J 1 to look at, & I I t o disguise, make so
. /
gaze at. as not to be recognized.
inf. seeing, look- I V to find strange, de-
ing at. ny; c . acc. T . e t S p e r s .
S. 0 *
look, view, as- t o be displeased with
/
pect, appearance. anyone for.
/.
,&part. yes, certainly. L;& day.
5 5 '0-5
+fem.,pZ- l.&
0.

@l soul, V211 to arrive at, to

self (5 11 e). come to an end.
S/,O,
Upl. use, ad- 2% extremity, ut-
most.
vantage, useful qual-
ities, acquirements. - Nehiiwend, town
 Glossary A. . 161

in North - west Per-

6'0 ' hoopoe.
sia. ,c&t o lead the right
S
~3 ,UC
a body of troups way.
which takes turns in TTIII to follow the
standing guard. right path.
S -
,lj fern. hell-fire.
+
C5& true, right gui-
/ S '
)$ light. dance.
S L, 5 ,U*

e7jcies,
pZ. kind, spe- Z.. .b p[. &I&
gift,
variety. present.
6,.
female camel.
1 , fem. .. (S
a& 12b)
L
; rned. , imp. a to lay this.
oneself down, to go to :,U,, ,S

yr'J"2' ( Abii Huraira,

sleep, to sleep.
name of a companion
imp. zc et i to dart
of Muhammed.
down (of a bird). 6 /r
S,'
ii+ flight.
F
? inf. fleeing, flight.

Muhammed'g
9

l'
6,
HishBm, man's
name.
flight from Mecca to
Medina. & part. interrog.
G /

,+a imp. U to intend doing

;G of
a thing.
Muhammed in the flight.
p imp. i, c. & to rush, p inf. care.
FJG ,
hurl oneself upon. p2. reptile.
162 ' Glossary A.

, - 0 , .-
U
Hamdiin, district
13.c(0 G) C
imp. i, c. U pers. to
,
in Southern Arabia. place confidence in.
7,
Zi*
0-7
aunaida, name of , ./
++.) imp.ito benecessary.
a castle in Southern I V to appoint, fix.
Arabia.
imp. i to find.
l& adv. here, in this V to take the direc-
place.
tion of, to go towards.
2 pros. he. '50,
+, pl.
S
SF)
7 ,
face,
mod., Y l l to fall in. presence.
S
~Grned., I e t I I to fright- +.S one.
en, terrify. S o _ 9
&L, pi. &F, wild
7 ,

' Gmed., to be light,easy.

r;, animal.
zTp air, atmosphere. ,,I
p, imp.i& to place, let.
9 pron. Ill fern. she.
, o$
+
valley, water-course.
i& an inspiring with ,p!
,Y 0-
Wndi al-
fear and awe, ma- Furs, name of a valley
jesty. in North Arabia. m

;conJ'. and, also, even. */,

313
imp. i to descend, go
in an oath with down.
the genitive: $7; by c. & to come to any-
God! one.
 Glossary A. 163

sTi; prep. behind. give good advice, esp.

-
tl,
.. U

id-
on a death-bed.

S . >.-
~ j ,pl. 5 vezier-
.
@j to be dirty. to have anyone recom-
... IT- mended to one.
r-' to put anyone
into a comfortable po-
Z.
L; P to perform the
sition ;to procure riches prescribed ablutions.
for.
S
F-' t1 wide, ample.
r; . imp. i to be clear,
evldent
. imp.
p,
-c 7 Tr
to lay, place.
&,
9 0.
striped cloth.
&,
... imp. i to describe,
V1 to be humble, ap-
pear to be humble.
to state, declare. S U
@pplace.
--'
S
pz. - &-j;a ;
; V c. ncc. perr. to
slave (who is fit for
threaten, to utter
anything).
S, /
7 ~ - . . threats against any-
+-'
pl. +L, one.
slave-girl (who is fit G;imp. i t o come to, to
for anything). visit a prince.
jb; h p . i to unite; to Sa_
pl. op,n
S 7,

arrive, get to. i

of persons visiting a
e3 IV c. acc. pers. to prince, deputation.
Ill*
164 Glossary A.

;; iny. i III c. acc. to 9

I1 to appoint as
come, arrive at. overseer.
S,. >;..c, S_.

F- &,S, d l &L,3 3;h p . i to bear (child).

God has taken him X'c.acc. to beget a son
(said of a Muslim) to of a woman.
himself, has let him die S .b?5
a blessed death-pass. to pl. aY3i child,
die a blessed death. son (sg. also col!.).
7 ,U.
PJ ,
,
gb, death, blessed +!.!I al-Walid, name
death. of a man (here of the

W,-:.time.
S Omayyad
705-715).
Caliph, r.
S .

J b.3 venerableness. i;N to turn one's back,

S "
,&;Wakk&, name of to turn back.
a man. c. 2 acc. to appoint
.;-immp
e
I
.

I&. to fall, dart anyone as governor

down. over . . .

-;imp. i to stand still, J7 to turn one's back,

to stand. to turn away.

5 9 ,
up, inf. standing. X c. &
r . to take
).V c. ace. to take possession of,
2, Ji; governor, rul-
care, to be afraid
of. er.
 Glossary A. 165
S ' 0 . '

proper name of a
bird.
&) Inear,appropriate,
.,5

fit; esp. near t o God &$G Hyacinth, Chryso-

= saint. lite.
&
.
j
$9), inf. becoming ... imp. a to be awake.
IV to wake.
governor, rule, reign.
X to have oneself
3;Wahb, man's name. waked, to awaken.
S 5
0.
calamity, woe. & c
adj. certain, sure,

G purt. exclam. (S 61) 0 ! trustworthy.

B
MYemen, South Arabia.
& imp. a, c. to
despair o f . .. 9&c(§ 49 not.)yemen-
S 8, itic.
inf. despairing, S /

to have no hope. right, right

hand.

fern., pl. *7.. ( 5 65 r)

H.
,0
*
on the
.

"r
right, right hand.
m hand, force, power. ) O r , O

S,++ ,p!Ibn Mai-

...
y to be easy. miina, man's name.
S,..left, 1. hand.
b a,+!
Y .Or
CO%Jews.
1
B .
p easy, little. -
CS$*
3.

Jew.
166 . Glossary A.

sor
P" L ;:; (B 65 day, S) one day, once.
day's journey; (pl. ,U ,U/

reign). Determ. also p$! (5 84 a) to-day.

9 h i s dayn. . -
*+
Or U,

re. (e. g!: p+) on

?f? On the day that day, then.
that . . . (5 66 c).
 p1. = plural, cfr. 63.

Aaron
9 7'
after, after that conj. a
Abraham h;!. q 73 f.
abstinence
CJ
&D
0 ,
after prep. a- d .$
7 9% agreeable to elat. -1
Ablr Bekr al-Rabbsni 9I
with it.
aid (to) U~
with .ucc.
"-
med. , IT7

abundant see much:

G
.Ali S.
accept (to) . imp. U.
all J$ with determ. noun
I,
acquire (to cause to) &
I V with tmo accus.
or suffix 5 85b. .

act well (to) 1% alms (to give in) "JJo

action h. Y with U .
, ..
address (to)
0s
III. along with Prep. c
affair
S
already g 73 e.
168 Glossary B.

alter (to) med. 5 11- apply oneself to (to) L

although 2;; 5 102. TJ with ncc.
among j. approach (to) ici~q~.
U,
-/
ample &I; elnt.
*

5 47 e. mith e.
3,. arise (to, in the morning)
'Amr .d 65
'/
5 rem. IT:
and 3. L .a .
as to L/ mifh nom. ancl 3
angel g& pl. 5 63, 31.
CJ c.
in the u.~odosis.
anger 4.
.
animal (domestic)
5 63, 26.
pl.
FJ.

, ashamed (to be)

41 c.
> X

so-
another than F with f o b
Zowing gen.
ask (to)& med. with
3. -to ask something
,
answer (to give) to ub of JL,imp. a, with two
X med. with 3. acc. 5 36 b.
3 -0

antidote Cj.b)$.
S..
ass )b.
...inly. a.
r
a;- assemble (to)
Antioch ...
any & (prep.).
assert (to) imp U. .
5 YIIL
apostatize astrologer
.U'
F.
5, -7

apostle JY).
FJ 7-
a t prep. b.

appear (to) .G.

appearance 3- baggage
 Glossary B. 169

he, exist (to) ;&med. ,. beginning

S 8-

1.
- not to be 5 42. believe (to) 1i7;-
beard 'a
... pl. 63, 3, believer id. part. act.
$ 40 c, rem. b. belly 3.
7 / 0 5
beardless ay! pZ. Q 63,l. beseech of (to) & rrr
with acc. o f person and
heat (to) imp. iJ inf.
S U - U of thing.
it+.
beauty
- -. 5 0 7
-beauties
best ezut. of good.
f .IC
better elat. of good.
-C*.
S . / FJ, between h. "/

beautiful fern. L; G r U c
elut. 5 47 e. -
to find beverage UypZ. 63,29.
to be beautiful X. birds COZZ. .
because &l Q 95 a.
,-5
birth 2;;.
p
2 ."E
Bedouin t. black ay!
7 - a s fem. 3 51 c.
before (of place) = be- bless (to) L 11.
tween the two hands
of (dual stat. constr.). body __ pl. 63, 19;

ges of (to) JL,imp. a, (m. 67).

with ucc. book G&
beggar part. act. of JL. born (to be)
., FJ.
d, F.
begin, begin with (to) bottom &b.
. ..
imp. uJ with acc. break (to) Y i m p . i
l70 Glossary B.

bring (to) + S&- med. 6. cast (to) imp. a.

- to bring an action
against one another
,
cease (to)Jlj med. , (for
j,j 5 39 a, 5 29).
,&VI.- - t o bring in - so,
IT.'. - to bring certain one (a) with
1
into &.a IF- - to pl. of follow. nozln.
bring out E,& IF: - character
5 0
& pl. 5
9
63,
to bring upon &l I.V 19.
5, -.
with &. characteristic b 5 L .
brother
s5
Z
1 fj 65 a, c; pl. chastise (to) 2 imp.
5 * *
U.

€j6 3 , 6 ; pl. when = chastisement +/L.

&friendsn5 63, 23. cheap (to become) &i
;
/

bury (to) imp. i, inf. hp-

5 0 . 5 P.
4
- 3 . chief pl. 5 63, 23.
but G.
?-

choose (to) )L. med.

-
VIJI.
by, by means of U. S ' c
; , chrysolite W,&.
Byzantines (the)coZZ. +,.L S *,,/
Christian &ly
Caliph G. 28.
pl, 63,
8

care +.
B r

claim (to) L3 VII.. 5 24

carry onwards (to) ;L rem.
med. 6,with +.
/ O M

claim ~ , s a .
/

S,,
cloak $;>-
case F- .
 Glossary B. 171
S ,.,
clot of blood iijilr.
- t o command any
.
of pers. a?td o o f thing.

clothe (to) a i n y . U-

city &*. thing to be done, id.

cognizant of + +
'. .
with c, and infin.
S0
& III.
5

combat (to) command 4 1 .

' S
combined (to be)*
L
YIX. . .
companion -Lr;) pl.
.-I
come (to) jifimp. i. -
5 63, 19.
5 .
to come to one's know- compassionate W).
ledge (concerning) $: concerning d.
,
f
imp. U , with acc. (and confide in (to) ~1 VIII.
G)...*
- to come in conquering part. act. of
upon &.a imp. U, with
&. - to come out
9-
from imp. U, with
consider as (to) 3 imp.
U , with acc.
0

&- consumed (to be) "F

command (to) 37
imp. U: YIII.
*
- t o command anyone contain (to) p
.-imp.
.. a.
to do a thing, id. with
acc. and
o f
with the
content (to be) 2'imp.
sz~bj. - to command a. - t o be content with,
anything to be given , ..
id. with U.
t o anyone, id. with 3
' S . .,
. contentment &b.
 172 Glossary B.

continence , (p" of
-
cure g b .
*

fr o -
cut (to) imp. a. -
;I;med. ,.
3
5 .

continue (to) to cut open pi?ty). U.

contradict (to) & 111. al-Dahhgk d&r.
7 U .

converse (to) ~ i ) uJ: - Damascus +a. ./

to converse about, id. fr
e. 0

with U.
.
daughter
.
S ,/

core dY.
- one day G;. -
counsel (to ask) l.&
V
nzed.
) to-day
- orOM

day-time ;G.
dead
S ,.,.
courage 26. *

cover up (to)
.-.imp. U.
death oyo.
fro/

deceive (to) iG imp. a.

cradle &p.
Ft 0 ,
S U

decline (to) e- PP1lI.

G,
decree (to)flimp. i.
crazy part. pass. o f ;;F?
9* demand (to) a thing ~ k ,
fem. L.
imp. a, with. 36 b. G,
creation &. depend on (to) S, I;, with
crucify (to) aimp. i. &.
cultivated part. act. of desert "-C oC

5-
5 63, 27,
fem. L. 64a.
 Glossary B. 173
* .
desirous of (to be) do according to 6
&.
/

med. r'II& 78ith mi.'itJ~.U.

6
,
detriment @i.
0 -

dog 2;
hunt.ing-dog
devoted to (to be)
VIII with j
..
&.S
4 -*

door
a
$G.
devotee part. act. of A+ 5

P-.
drachma p)$.O
.

die (to) &G

5 .
med. ,. draw forth (to) -
dread (to)
)F W.
imp. a .
difficult p+. 5
dress 4pl. 5 63, 29.
.Or

C /

drink (to) 9 . k imp. a.

disease $To.
8 . drunk, drunien
disgraceful :.
fy- 5 c

dwelling ,fa.
dish ;;L;. S c.
East J+.
dislike (to) imp. a. S
. .
disobedient ;art act. of easy p+-
* .S

. P- eat (to) JSIinip. U ; imperat.

dissolve (to) L13 ned. ,. 36 b. - to give to
distance & ~ . eat of ,,.xb IF' with acc.
0

distinguish (to) pers. and &.

5 /B
imp. U. education+ol. -t o show
do (to) *
imp. a; J..L one's education ~ o J<;
imp. a (no. 139). -to elder pl. 63, 29.
elect (to) &D FII1. escape (to) imp. U.
=7 c -

elegance Jk. / /

escape &.
5.0
enamoured of (to be) estate X+ pl. 63, 10.
C

&+C
.
.

imp. a, mith acc. eulogize (to)

.-.imp. a ; &O
e
id. F7III (no. 134).
enchanter >L.
- ,
encounter (to) 111. evening (late) &.
S 0 .
2 7
endurance d. every mith indeterm.
1-
enemy J &C.
8 7 ,
tioun.5 S5 b.
S.
evidence &.
.
enjoy oneself (to)
entail (to) & I%
V.
evil (to be) med. ZL ,.
enter (to) &o
../imp. U. - to do evil id. IV. -
evil-doer part. act. of
entertain (to) 6pimp. i,
8 C

id. I K
-re

iRfi g 19. evil 5

/ S . U ,
"Y',-', U

entrance &h. example Zi .

r"s-
entrust (to) anyone with
p,X with two (LCCUS. except $1P (=
e

3 8 98.
envious part. act. of b. ;ss
-. - except that MP..-
equal :ly. g 95 b.
5 ,,,
ere, conj. 21 &" 75. excepting G G with acc.
err (to)
S . .
inf. k. excuse (to)
1
imp. i.
S O Y
error Jk. excuse L)LC.
1
 Glossary B. 175
,
five
b; a . $5 66, 67 a.
eshort (to) 1
;;; [?Bp. wj

38 a. flare up (to) -7 V.
: exist (to) &'med. ,- flight G>. E
exit ;?a imp. U.
r

flourishing (to make) .'

i"' c

exterior i&G.
fly (to) f r o m 2 imp. i, with
extract (to) X.
eye 50. 5 0- S

+,. folk ,.,S pl. S 63,19 ; y F ,

L3 0 ,

face
fast (to) ;L; med.
G 'r
,. coll. (nr. 120).
follow (to) imp. U. ,$
father 65 a. fool part. act: of &.
fault %pl. 63, 12. for prep. J <
5 70 h; con..
0.5
favour u , p l .
< /
63, 3. "G § 71 c.
fear (to) 3k-med. y forbid (to) a thing to any-
U, § 39 a.
one
l _ - imp. i, with
feed (to) p b IFv. two uccus.
(to) with one another force (to) jd 7111. 3 24
&S V-I. rem.
fihd (to) 9 3Ba-
imp-i~ forelock '&G pl. 5 63,
fire ;c. 25, 64 a; 5 40 b.
forgive (to) $ imp. i.
fit & elat. Jyt. -,.E
forgiving ),ss.
S ?,
1.76 Glossary B.

forgiveness (to beg) -X. give (to) L L / 1' n.itIt tn.0

/
UGC. - to give K a - inf.
.S Y
form pl. S 63, 4.
four 67 )is 66, 65 a. "
"
l
5
&
7- ?

c5.
r,
fourth glance PI. 63, 19.
glorifj- (to)
friend
S
L+& p2. 5 63,20; C- II.
r,
intimate friend &.. ~ I O ~ ~&-L
O U Sdot. 47 e.
+- S/.*

frieildly glorx Q-.

/

from prep. &.

. g o round (to).fj
1
med. ,.
fruit X&.
/< - t o go away S 5
1
gain (to) 4 r'. inzp. N. - t o go on
50.
+G. & in2p.i. - t o go
game .
out &. ittip. U. - to
.C

garment pl. 63,10, E1

let go 3, IK
39 e rem. 5 .r
)
gate G&. c*-
gate-keeper -
5. m.
1-
god %;
2
&
God &Q,
by God
gather up (to) hlil YIII. dtj.
get to (to) & VIII with gold-piece;&gpl. 5 65 lr.
fJ V
.
&..- t o get through good noun and adj.
1
elat. id. - to be good
i y . . a.
imp. U. - to
9 r

gift pl. 9 63, 29.

make good ~ l . b
med.
girl &
.;I) IF.
.
 Glossary B. 177
r,
government or the subject in the dative
.
L&).. .-.
(with 3) followed by the
,
, C
object in the nom. (as
governor j,.
3 he has money) ;
grandee & pl. 5 63,12. occasionally a form of
grant (to)
2- lvith c)
to be stands before
tmo accus. fie subject (as 5
5
grateful (to be)-+ imp. U. JLhe had money). -
great 2- to be, be- , not to have either as in
the lust example, but
come great p m P . U.

green 3;. 3 (S 42) instead

lviih
S '
1 of &U= (3.2 3 3)
greeting ,AL. -

or 3 with fo~~owing ob-

guard (to) med. ,;
ject (5 81 b ) and dative
9 0 ,

inf- ~ y . of subject (3 31; 9).

5 *.
guest U+.
13 b.
head p).
S 7.
h e y (to) g h p . a, inf.
&i.
hate M .
" 9
heart S.
have (to), is expressed by heaven ';C,
178 Glossary B.

heir part. act. of +,pl. hunt, chase b.

5 0 .

5 63, 7.
3
hell-fire )U!.
help (to)
G -

bnp. U. -
hurry (to)
al-Husain s"t.
&U 11.

hypocrisy
t o demand help of .
,
med. X with +.
,
hypocrite part.
@ 111.
act. of

Heraclius G-$. I 67.

high b.
. ignorance +.
S U d

hope for (to) l;

)
-imp. u,
ignorantpart. act:of +.
with ucc.
ss . idea + pi. 5
90.
63, 27,
horse @IJ. 64 a.
horsemen coll.
S 0 ,
L. if 21 fj 102; in hypothe-
house W.
how 3
ticai clauses 9 with the
perf. - if anyone
U ,
@

however 3
.%mith foNow. 5 102.
verb.
illustrious . elat.
humble ,(to be) p, VJ.
5 47 e.
hungry Part* act. of iG imperfection inf. of wb*
med.
'
.
c
med. VI. ,
hundred Zk 5 66, 67 C. in prep. j.
,
incumbent on (to be)
.,
*./
hunt (to) ;G med. G.-
to go forth to hunt id. % imp. i, with & 3 38 a.
 Glossary B. 179
.
d
J - U 0-

indicate (to) 35 imp. U, Islam tlL,Yl.

P

mith &. '

Israel &U!-!.
..'/ g
P r o

S
indication @S.
... r rs7 l

Jaliil al-din +&l 3%-

,/
indigestion c+.-,
S
> U '0'

Jerusalem wL)LiiJI.
inform (to) p IV. '
Jews (the) coll. 0 41. 7<0,

inhabit (to) inip.

S
U.
join (to) &
. imp. U, mith
inhabitants &f.
U-
inquire concerning (to) .
Jonah
' 7 . Y

8 X mith j. , 7 9 J
Joseph L$.
intelligent purt. uct. of
. S J t
&c-
Joy ))yr.
interior b'
S. . justice JL.
Fy'.
interrupted (to be)
ck. keep from (to) g imrp. a,
VII. miih ace. azd e.
0

into prep. j. keep intact (to) IV.

,
.invest (to) anyone with kill (to) imp. U.
m g imp. a, with & kindle (to) G;imp. i.
ofpers. and acc. of thing. king h. S ,.d
0 ,
6.
inviolability ii.o
invite to (to)
re
G3 imp. U,
kingdom
kiss (to) cEucj. U. .
Nith Jf.
P
knock (to) at the door of
Mm*
180 Glossary B.

G *
~s imp. u , with & leave, leave off (to) J;1
1
of pers. u?~d
acc. o f door. imp. 2'.
know (to) -+imp. a ;
/ j
/
.
C

i'
let (to) &SJimp. a 5 38 a.
imp. np. 13%); r5;j
liar (to declare anyone to
imp. i (nr. 73). be a) QUJr.
3 .
knowing part. act. o f ,&S ; liberal
C

elut. 47 e. lie, tell a lie (to)

Koran
,-O>U/

*tap. i;inf. &%

life (the future, next world)
;L.
lack
lamp f
;pi.
fp'. lifetime 5b-L+.. ._
laugh (to) && imp. a. - v Iv.- to
to laugh at id. with e.lightgive(to)light t o a b med.
- to make laugh id.
I v. 3 W , with J.
like d
with gen. - like
law-code +.2y
5.

as
lawful (to be) &. imp. i. likeness 3.
lead (to) G
; med. ,. little U-.
.- /

learn (to) [clc V.

learned pl. 5 63,22. li~ng >.
live (to) &C; med. 6.
 Glossary B. 181

, manifest part. uct. c;rl+

*'
long for (to) med.
T7III,with &. med. G IP-.
Y -.-

look a t (to) imp. u, mankind coll. wUl.

with ](.-t0 100k down manner
S
p,- 0 .

L,

ip ~ v . - t o look into marry (to) Oct.

,II.-neut. id. V.
vied-

.§ 24,
VII& with j
MarryG>.
rem.
lord
'.
-.
v). meat 2.

-
love, fall in love with (to)

love -.' - 7
IV, with UGC. medicine
meet (to)
b.
-.
&.f imp. a.
loving inf.
lower
lust
+S.
.-.
S,

(to) & imp. U .

S.".
-lusts ul*.
..

S .<
mien *.
mention (to)
e r .U

+* .
mighty -. elat. Ij 47 e.
23 imp. U.

1'- S.- 3 '

make, make to be (to) mill sFlb.
imp. q (with two accus.). mindful of (to be; p imp.
U, with acc.

naed. ,. S .
c
miracle X
S*

X+;
0 Y

* Y

malady ,.,L,. misfortune pl.

al-Ma'mhn uPL+J t.
7 YE.0.
5 63, 26.
man &.pl. 63,lO; g o * modesty <G.
1
(nrs. 2, 43, 102). moment (this)
I" &mi.
 F'
5
JL.-piece of name Y!.
U
money
s.u
-
m o n e y 6 a pl. 5 63,29. narrow S - -
(= -)5 ......
50
.
month +. elat. 47 e.
morning (early) bjl;.
5-0 7
nature 2
pl. 5 63, 10.
morrow, to-morrow
.'
*.
S ,
near (to place)
F' -0
+F
Moses <F. needle b.y!
mosque d
- ..neighbour L;&. 5 .
most elut. of much. niggardly &+.-t.
o de-
mountain G. clare anyone to be n.
much p e l a t . 47, e.- '& 11.
- S O '

to be much, abundant niggardliness &.

7 imp. u.-to make night a-
dlV-
al-Mukira <#j.-..
noble >+?-nobles
X,- .
toll.

F' ='.
Mu$amm&d &S. not 3. .
S ,,
music +,. now conj. 6.
Muslim (to become a) +, nutriment
S
~9 '

I??-Muslim id. part.

O! g 61.
act. .--
MuzH&n '+p. obedient to (to be) &-
imp. U, with J. -
5 .U> S
naked fm. L. obsene (to) VIJJ.
occasion as a consequence pass on (to let) - & med.
(to) +is I F ; with two ,
IT<
)

UCCZLS. pearls coll. BJk7 93. I

Omar y .
9.9
pebble ;C;;.
on account of prep. $.
one us noun or ndj.
5
+l,
- people K.
j;j 95 a.
S
fezlt. : g ; with pron.
S -S perish (to) imp. i;-
suffix L!. to cause to p. id. W.
only G!. Sk.
person (man)
.
9 0.0
onslaught Pharao c]y$.
open (to)
SO . c
.--.
.imp. a; inf-
physician 2.
.
c-
opinion (to be of)
"- pick up (to)
S, ,
imp. U.
imp. U, 5 41 b. piety -
place &>pl. 5 63, 29.
"5
or ,!.
FT. .
other place (to) 2; imp. a.
d p IV.
.overtake (to) . 5 38 a.
S
owner &G PZ. 5 63,19.
,a

plants coil. ulj(masc.)

9 . 9
page, bog please (to) 4. . s W.-
90'0.
to be well pleased with
Paradise i d ! .
pardon (to) imp. U,
- #

imp- a luithc;)C
0 #

with &. pleasure ;$JIZ. 5 53.

184 ~ l o s s a r yB.

pliancy -. -
S. prepare (to)
&' IJ7.
poem, poetry
r,
f i PI- 5 63,
0

presence g
5.

Ye
0.9

19. present (gift)'G.

poete 12. preserve (to) Limp. a.
poison
f 2 .
V' pride
polite scholar &.$ ~
*
1 - prince 7-'
/ .
$lE iplg 63, 22.
5 63, 22. prison e.
FJ U

poor f l pl. 5 63, 22.

0 .
8 ,-
, - promise L+.
possessor ,3 fern. UI~. ~JG,,

poverty ?.
. -S e prophecy (gift of) g+-,.

ss, to pretend to prophecy

power iip. 5.

v.
praise (to)
praise Tg.
2.
d.

ppl. 5 63, 20.

prostrate oneself (to)
pray (to) ak 12. imp. U.
S / / e/

prayer %K;r (=;$ protect (to) wF imp.U,i.

5 39 a) pZ. 5 59.-dire& provide for (to) dj]imp.u,
.
d
.

'
S.,
tion of prayer W;.- with tnto accus.
S. Y ,
leader of prayer ; ~ tB . puishment
preach to (to) imp. purify (to) +11-to p.
U, with ace. oneself id. V.
56 9
precede (to) ,.M V. purse Zi
7"
 Glossary B. 185

pursue (to) F VIII- religion

S
d2.
put (to) imp. a.-to rely on (to) S)VJII, with
S

put of£tillF\ IJ. with?.

S c .
& 138 C. e

(to) inf. &-a). repel (to) 3; imp. U.

raise, raise up (to) 5; repent (to) uG..med. ,.

&)! -
50- S-/
imp. a ; inf. repentance h/&.
Rama;I&n :G>. S/
report j?j.
/

al-Rashid .- i.
9
.? reproach (to) med. ,.
reach (to) d13 IV.
5.-
restore (to) c!,med., JV.
read (to) tlj. imp. a. restrain from(to) a i m p .
recede from (to)
Y
&imp. G, with acc. and *.
0 r
-
a, with c)a_. to r. oneself from id.

recite (to)
-5-,
l2 imp. a.
with G.
reed-pen '&. resurrection
B/
LOG;.
*..
reflection inf. of
-.5
p V. return to (to)
with f e!.
r-1
imp. i,

.. refuse (to) imp. a.- I

* to r. to do id. with d!
05 right (due) 6.
5
and subj. right, right hand ...-.
A

9;.
regret ,.&. rise in value (to) imp. u.
relate (to) &.-imp. i.
B
B"
roof cbiiu.
/

related to .* routed(tobe),..~~I.
twith
rule (to) &G med. ,. seize (to) &l
. .Z

*
imp. W;
run races (to)
C C O r
self 3 3 11e.
saddle..(of an ass) ilca,+ send (to) &,, ?V.-to S.

to id. with &.

S ,c'
safe (to be) imp. a. serpent U&-
al-saffhb ' &3i. &
servant (i. e. of God)
salt
c
,&. pl. 5 63, 10.
serve wine to (to) &imp.
. C

say (to) J1j' med. ,.-to

i, with ace.
set about (to) ;G med. G,
say of anyone id. with
0 r with imp. 5 74 c. rem.
@.--to S. to anyone r 1 0 1

id. with 3. seventy U--I '

scatter (to)
so r 4 imp. u, t shadow $.b.
shift (to) imp. i.
Seaf- C
S,
/

second 2J.: ship S&-.,.

2 C

secret pl. 5 63, 19. S

shirt W.
/

Fs - r

security shoulder
sea (to) ey
S

imp. a, 5 41 b. sign
5,-
pl.
C

5 53.
seedy part. pass. of +. silent (to be) inf.
s o ,
U .
seek (to) 3imp.:.-
to S. for oneself id. V.
seemly (to be) & VII. singing (art of)
 Glossary B. 187

sit with (to) +111; with 50,

UP-.
(ICC.
S,.
spare (to) X, 2 5 41 c.
size speech J p
S ,-
S ' .
0
slave 4i.L. pl. fj63,30.- spend (to) (of time) i n f .
slave-girl 2 G p l . 5 63, F- 5 ,
25, 64 a. spirit
Q).
sleep, go to sleep (to) ;L'
staff G.
med.,, imp. a; part. act.
stand (to) med., ; part.
p!. 5 63,lO; 5 39e, rem.
act. pl. $ 63, 10, $ 39 e,
small W.-to
S .
become
rem. - to stand still
/ /

S. imp. a. d*-

-'
ccij'
Y imp. i.
smoke c)L.o.
5
star 2.
snow F.- 1 .

start off (to) a;?, V-

stay (to) rb rned., IV.
sober part. act. o f G. steal (to) q+,imp. i.
c c

Sohates L!#"
i"" .
stratagem L.
.- .
salioitude L. stream L.
S o
strength JP.
50.
son +! 65 b (the sound
' - 0 '
'. plural with names of h f b a +X-&-
tribes). submissive (to be) 36 Y.
5- a k
song %lpl. 5 63, 27. subsistence .
)
j
"
S0
188 Glossary B.

B
sufficiency cl& that c o d . 21 (before a
verb);
.*
C)f (before a noun
supplication gc;.
8 95 a).
surely (after :L)- that which G.
S*.
tail &b. .
then cj.
< . S
take (to) &l imp. u.- C.'

(of a cityj c;mp.

.CC

U. thief & pZ. 5 63, 12.

to t. away 4 5 imp. U, U
thing $&
@

pl. 63, 19.

with u.-t~ t. hold of
. -6
&.! imp. F.
U, with
think (to) 3
imp. U , with
, two accus.; inf.
3.
h.
talk to (to) with
@cc.- to t. to one an-
third &,$- § 68 a.
other id. K thirty &,.%X- $5 66,67 b.
talk this (L5 l 2 b.
' A = -

tattle &. Thora (the) tr)+t.

teach (to) ,&11,with two those who 5 13 b.

>.
0 8

UCCUS. thou d.
ten 7 $5 66, 67 a. thought
S ,.
than &. three &U 5s 66, 67 a.
that Pmn. &!; 5 l2 through @g meam of)
that (in order that) J with prep. +.
,
3;
/

suZ,j. 5 75. throw away (to) *p.

 Glossary B. lS9

i.-to throw down &

trustworthiness iijLcl.
0. /Z

5 c
1FT. truth J+.
tidings, to give glad tid-
turn (to) ,jG med 6.-
ings to anyone of a
to turn from py V4
thing 1I, mith @cc. L.

of pers. and U. wIUit1~ , p-to t. away

5 ,.
time . L-.-(proper)time (@c'-) :j imp. u--to t.
0 1 away from (neut.) J, 11,
r, O.

Vt'?' c
7 with &.
tipsy 5,' U

5 twinkling &.
title-page % o/9
'Ubaid U....
to (direction) prep. 21; 5

(sign. of the dative) J. / .c

tongue Q
; pl.
. 8 63,18. unbeliever Part-act- c f
pl. 53. i"'
t,owards prep. JI. . / ,<

S U / uncover (to) &imp. i.

transgression +j pl.
- 63,. 12. understanding k.
tjansitory part.act. of#. unmindful of (to be)
- travel (to) .
med. 6.
""W:
U .

'l B.
until conj. +generally
treasure
S-.
P.
a-
.. with subj.
tree a"p.

L
'- ~j.9.
e U-
upon prep.
tribe
S.
.- .
L
+
.

/
P" 8 63, 26. used to (he) &g
rned. ,
trick . e
with follow. imp. 5 74 c.
190 Glossary B.

value
5.
+; when re[.interr. ,p;conj.
..
B t
vehemence g+. G!- 5 101.
vehement -l;. where? &.I.-
# 06
wherefrom,
verily l; .SS 95, 71 c. whence &.I
/ 0s 0

fl.
viand pl. $ 63, 29. G-
which relat. e&I.
violent &G.
S
25

made through (to)

nled. ), with ace.
>L whichever
while (a) L)L.
13 c.

want (to) ol) med.) IT;. whilst c$. 5 100.

want &L;. who rel. &&l ;interr.
.
a
W.

3.
war (holy) inf. 3% of
* III. why? 2;why then? 15 0.
Waraka B. -7
19- wick id& j.8
wash (to) imp. i. W .

5 ' 5
wickedness
waste flL fem. EL.-to
will (to) &L med. e.
render waste +.p11.
wind 5 50.
water CL.
.-
S Y Su,
well e., wine y.
West +F.
FJ

-
''_
wisdom G.
whale wF.
B 7
wise '4 pi. 63, 22.

. interr. G.
what rel. ,
wish (to) a! med.
)
, TV.
 Glossary B. 191

.
with prep. -.-with re- write to (to) sim
gard to prep. j.
0.
, with 21.
without (Mth gen.). wrong (to, to do) it~p.
.
Toe to! J 3;. i; inf. S&.

Yazid
.7o%
G+.
.
SZ*, SB,_ ye ,,xi!.
woman idy.- 5,.
year L.
women <L.
yes
,.
+.
U

5 7
wood arc.-piece of mood S .
S... young 9
.~elat.
1 5 47 e,
p1 5 63, 29.
word
young man &pl. 63,23.
4 .
work pl. 5 63, 19. youth ;g.
-0 2 /

world (tge, this) L&\.

worst p.
W /

W. Dmgalin, Oriental Printer, Leipzig.

 ERRATA.

Paradigmata.
S JU
3, 1 +m*.
d
9, LU: fem. Sing. Imperf. Ind.
6, Inf. 111 3 6 . *c
and JI mssc. pu.
/

5 ,U> 15,Perf. Act. IV 2

6:.
7, Part. IX p.
8, I1 fern. PI. 8;. 20, Inf. IT <GI.
H. _Reuther's__
Verlagsbuchhandlung
p
.
--
_ -__
.-
_I-___.
in
-
Berlin S.W:
-_
Keilinschriftliche Bibliothek
Sammlung
1011

assyrischen und babylonischen Texten

U m s c h r i f t und ~ b e r s e t z u n ~ .
I n Verbilldung mit
Dr. L. A b e l , Dr. C. B e z o l d , Dr. P. J e n s e n ,
Dr. F. E. P e i s e r , Dr. H. W i n c k l e r
herausgegeben
von
Eberhard Schrader.
L Band. XVI, 218 S. p. 8. Nit einer Karte &I. g.-.
11. ,, VI, 292 S. gr. S. ,, ,,. ,, 11. 12.-.
111. ,, ' 2. HBlfte, IV, 117 S. gr. 8. N. 6.-.
Das vorstehende Unternehmen ist dazu bestimmt, die seit
einer Reil~evon Jahren im Bereiche des alten Assyrien nnd
Babjlonien gemachten Inschriftenfunde in einer chronologisch
nnd zugleich sachlich geordneten Sammlung in illren wichtig-
sten Repllisentanten zu vereinigen und in transcribirtem Text
mit gegeniiber stehender deutscher a e r s e t z u n g qorzpjegen.
Wird die Wiedergabe des transcribirten Originaltextes den An-
forderungen strenger W i s s e n s c h a f t Genuge zn leisten bestrebt
=in, so wird die beigefiigte W o r t g e t r e u e ~ b e r s e t z u ndie ~ fiir
Geschichte so hochdchtigen Inschriftenfimde auch' den
n i c h t a s s y r o l o g i s c h v o r g e b i l d e t e n L e s e r n , in erster
L i e H i s t o r i k e r n und ~ h e o l o d e n , aber auch J u r i s t e n
und AlterthumCfr6uliden yeitesten S S e des Worts
zuganglich zu machen suchen Durch sorgfiiltige literarische
Nachweise und die Beifiigung sachlicher nnd sprachlicher Erlau-
terungen in knappestkr ~ o r mist fiir die Orientirung des Lesers
a d dem betreffenden Gebiete in entsprechender Weise gesorgt.
B-lich der bei Answahl, Transcription und h e r s e t z u n g im
Einzelnen befolgten Gmndsatze verweisen wir auf das Vorwort.
DasZusammenwirken einer Reihe von fachmiinniselien Gelehrten,
an deren Spitze Prof. Dr. Eberh. Schrader in Berlin steht,
diirfte dem T e r k e eine dauernde Bedeutung sichern.
T'on den bereits erscl~ie~tenen Biinden der ,.Keilinsciirift-
lichen Bibliothek'' umfasst B a n d I die h i s t o r i s c h e n T e x t e
cles a l t a s s y r i s c l ~ e l lR e i c h s nebst chronologischtn Beigaben :
B a n d LI briilgt in Urnsclrrift und cbersetzung, sowie mit den
nijthigen einleiteliden Bemerkungen und sonstigen Erlilute-
rungen versehen, h i s t o r i s c h e T e x t e d e s n e u a s s y r i s c h e n
R e i c h s nebst einem Anlrnnge und chronologischen Beigaben;
B a n d 111 wird in zwei Abtlteilungen erscheinen, von denen
die erste die a l t b a b y l o nis c h e n Inschriften, die zweite die
des n e u b a b y l o n i s c h e n Reichs enthalten wird. Die zunachst
erscheinende e r s t e Abtheilung des III. Bandes wird nach-
stelrende Inschriften bringen:
KSnigsinsehriften von Ur, Ereeh, Larsam, Xipur U. S. W.;
Inschriften Gudea's aus Tello ;
Insehriften Kiinigs Hammnrabi ron Babglon;
Inschrift KSnigs Agukakrimi;
Insehriften von Tell-el-Amama;
Zwei Insehriffen Konigs Nebukadnezar's I.;
Steintafelinsyehrift Jiom Sonnentempel zn Sippar;
Insehriff en Samag-sum-nkin's.
dam: eine Karte der Entwieklung der babylonischen Theil-
herrschaften und des babylonisehen Reichs.
Die game Sammlung ist auf vier, in jahrlichen Zwiscken-
raumen erscheinende Biinde im Urnfange von je ca. 15 bis
20 Bogen bernessen; jedem Bande historischen Inhalts wir8,
soweit erforderlich , eine erlauternde K a r t e von HOE
H. K i e p e r t beigegeben sein.
Indem wir znr Snbscription auf die
Keilinschriftliche Bibliothek
hierrnit ergebenst einladen, bemerken wir, dass jede solide
Buchhandlung in der Lage ist, die emchienenen baiden amten
B k d e auf Verhgen mu: Eimicht vorzdegen.
 HEBREW GRAMMAR
with Reading book, Exercises, Literature and Vocabularies
by
Hermanm L. Xt~~nck,
D. D.,Ph. D.
Professor o f Theology i n BerIin.
Translated from the German by Prof. A r c h d R. S. Kennedy.
Srcm~denlarged edition. S. XSI. 264 p. cloth S/.
deutsche Ausgabe: D r i t t e neubearbeitete Auflage. hr. 3.60.
Cdition fran~aise traduite par A. F. Baumgartner. ~ d i t i o n revue et
augmentee par l'auteur. 8. XII. zso p. sewed 3/6d.

Opinions and Reviews.

Le fiIz~sr'~)tt,
Janvier 1586: La grammaire hebralque de blr. Strack,
spCcia1ement dans la seconde edition, merite d ' b qual@be a"excellerz1e; elle
donne ce qn'un livre d e classe doit fournir pour mCriter cette qualification . ..
C'est surtout dans 1'exposC du verbe que l'auteur temoigne d'une connaissance
..
nza@fraZe et d'une mifhode s & z f $ p e , unie B un systeme pratique excellent .
Rev. Prof. Ai&in (Princeton) in: The Presbyterian Review, July 1886.
ThiJ ZiirIe book d Z be foz171a' useful mm by advanced HeI~ews&olars.
The A n z d a n 1886, No. 290: I t is yet flu best Hebrew Gramnrar for
reaching purposes which has thus far appeared.
The Guardian 1886, Aug. 25: A work which has a high reputation in
Gennany. I t is "fhe result of many year? exjerieizc~~'in practical teaching.
Rev. Prof. Kirkpatn24 (Cambridge) in: The Expositm, June 1886: Prof.
Strack's name is a guarantee of accurate and careful work.
Rev. Ch. H: H. W e t (Dublin) in: 17-13EccZe&ticaZ Gaeeffe,July 1886: A
most z;duabte synopsis of Hebrew Grammar.. . The syntax iJ penrbriy safifartiwy.
Prof. W&. Harper (Yale CoUege) in: Hebraica, January 1886: I n this
w&k, Dr. Strack has given an indication of the Hebrew learning for which
h e is so well known, not only in Europe, but also in America. But more
than this, h e has indicated his ability as a practical teacher. The boo& ir
fresh, v&ourmrs, scinltrjc.
. Prof. S. R. Dnitm (Oxford) in: The Acadpny, Dec. 1883 [ I re Cdit.] : The
work is an m~i?zent&pacfical one and bears traces throughout of the in-
dependent labour, which has been bestowed upon it.
Prof. Kaufisch (Titbingen) in : TheuZogj,che Litc~afurzeitung288.4, No. 2 :
,,%erall gibt sich griindliche Vertraulheit mit dem Stoff und rPiChlz2kepEda-
gogi'che Erfahnmg kund.lC
--
W i a m s 6t Norgate, 14, Henrietta Str., Cov. Garden, London; and 20, South
Frederick Str., Edinburgh-B. W e s t e n n a n n & Co., 8 I 2, Broadway, New York.
 H. Reuther's- Veslagsbucl~hancllungin Berlin S.W.
- --
-----p-- ~ - .. ..

THEODOR BENFEY,
KLEIKERE SCHRIFTEK.
.Xus~exil::: und heransgc:c:,e- ran
Dr. Adalbert Bezzenberger.
Gc-<?~;/:-i,:
7)ii: Ctztt.~:f8Gz'z:;1:,; c21 L'h/&L;rA ; T C ~ ; I - . - ~ ; . . ~ ~ C V ~ A?~!;I~SVI!~~~,-~~-T~:I
~ ~ 2nn,
3 j *icy
A<i>~L:.'i~.icv? G=.ic,?l~rhiqf
dc,r ~ ~ ~ J I ~ ; Z G.?!.'I:,;~.?:.
~ I~ ~ c I $ ~ ? ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~

E r s t e r E and. Erste und zil-ei:e -Xbtheilung in e i n e m Eande.

3Iit dem Liidnis Th. Eenfey's.
1890. XL, 341 S.; 199 S. gr. 8'$. M. 22.-.

Man macht sich wohl keiner Uebertreibcng odr;r UngerecI~ti;~keit schnldiq,

wenn man beliauptet, dass Benfey alle eigentlichen Sanscritisten unter den
Zeitgenossen an linguist. Ur:heil, alle 1.inguisten in seiner besonders durch
tiefgehendes Studinnl Panitlis und der Veden gen?i!lrten I<enn:niss des Sanscrit
iibertraf. Es bleibt daher ein grosses 17erdienst des Herausgebers, die vorlie-
genden Arbeiten der Gelehrtenweit erhalten zu haben. Ueberali, WO Genfey mit
seiner Arbeit er!~stlich eingesetzt hat, hat er fordernd gewirkt. Cies gilt am
lueisten fiir das Gebiet der aitindischenPl~ilologie,\vie denn anch von den beiden
erschienenen Theilen der erste, das Sanscritphilologische urnfassende, die wert-
vollsten Stiicke ent!ia:t. Die durch Geist und Gelehrsamkeit auch den heutizen
1,eser in t a u n e n versctzende Abhand11:ng iiber ,,Indienc' zeigt, s-ie weit e r
es 1840 bereits gebracht hatte etc. (Aus ,,Gott. Gel.-rZnzeiger", 1890, 10.)
.- . . - ~ ~ . - -
.P
--- ~-
ORIENTALISCHE BIBLIOGRAPHIE
Unter Mitwirkung der Herren
Dr. A. Bezzenberger, Dr. Th. Gleiniger,
Dr. Joh. Miiller, Dr. Richard J. H. Gottheil, Dr. H. L. Strack,
Dr. K. Vollers, Dr. T h . Ch. L. Wijnmalen,
U. A.
IIerausgegeben von Dr. August Muliiller
'a .

-
Y2brlicb 8 FIgfe. S u h ~ c ~ f i o zM, e S.-. [email protected].
Urtheile.
- On peut dire non seulement qn'elle rCpond I'attente mais qu'elle
la depasse de beaucoup. Complete, exacte et methodique sont les trois
qualitesque l'on pourrait exiger: il reunit les entikrement. (Le hiuseon tom. IV. 5.j
,,Die Bibliographie ist mit hachster Sorgfayt gearbeitet und bis jetzt ganz
regelmassig erschienen. Der sehr billige Preis ermoglicht jedem Interessenten
die Xnschaffung." Prof. TVellhausen, Theol. Litt. Ztg. 1889. 3.
,,Man kann fest behaupten, dass etwas xhnliches an umfassender und
ersch6pfender Sorgfalt auf dem Gebiete der oriental. Literatur noch niemals
geboten worden ist." Theol. Jahresbericht VIIL
 ASSYRIAN GRAMMAR
with
Paradigms, Exercises, Glossary and Bibliography
by
Ptaied,*ich Dditxsc7~.
Translated from the German
by
Prof. Archd R. S . Kennedy, B. D.
8. X Vt. 446 p. cZofh 15;.
This standard work thus becomes accessible to many students who would
otherwise have had to contend with the difficulties of German as well as of
the ctaeiform writing etc. 2%e ~Vafimz,Jzi& 2889.
' ~ i~ as sim~>leand well arranged as is nossible in t h e
n e l i f ~ ~ r hxxmrli

SYRIAC GRAMMAR
with
Bibliography, Chrestomathy and Glossary
by
Dr. E&ei+*J~ard
Nestle.
Translated from the second German edition
by
Prof. Archd- R. S. Kennedy, B. D.

W e welcome the second edition of this excellent elementary Syriac

grammar no longer i n Latin, but in German and English garb. It presup-
poses an acquaintance on the part of the student with Hebrew. Having
such preparation, beginners will find t h e occasionally, technical language of
the author intelligible, his statements correct and concise, a n d his conception
of what form the essentials of Syriac grammar just. As an elementary book,
the grammar is compact and complete. (The P~es&fenanRmkru, A p d 1889.)
-- -
..-
-p

Williams & Norgate, 14,Henrietta Str., Cov. Garden, London; and 20, South
Frederick Str., Edinburgh.-B.Westermann & Co., 812,Broadway, N e w York.
 It is an azmirntle li:t;e \I-ork, the best ;.rohn!,?!. for l,e,oinners, 2s it
c o n t a i ~ s n 2110;: 'un: ccmjilete g r x ~ ~ m r .nr ?reading specimen a-i:!: anal)-sis,
a survey of Fyrinc literature, a Chrestomathy consisting of :he fir.: f m r
chapters of Genesis, ard a Glossary coniaininp al: the words occur;in~ in
the Chrestomathy, and explaining .
all the diffcult forms.
.- -
Triihner's
- --
~p-..
Record.

L I T T E R A T U R A SY RILACA
extracted from tl:e
Syriac G r a m m a r
by
DR.EEEREI.
SESTLE.
So. I\-. 66 p. 2 .
- - "It is very convenient; and librarians and bibliophiles will knoa
how to value it."
-p-- -- - - - -- -
Independent
-
30. \ 111. SS.- -

ARABIC CRANXAR
with
Paradigms, Literature, Chrestomathy and Glossary
by
DR. A. S O C I N ,
PROFESSOR I S T H E U S I V E R S I T Y O F LEIFSIC.
S n XVI. 294 p. cloth 7s. 6d.

Opinions and Reviews.

Dr. Socin, thwpfore, desmes fhe xillcer~ fka7r.k of a22 e~~,ya+-din AraJic
tr~itio~zin thir co~17tfryfor haz*i~zsrecast into a n r a a d nrwe ucctptalle fbrnz
the late Prof. Petermann's "Brevis linguae arabicae grammatica" which forms
4th part of the yell-known series of introductory oriental grammars
styled “Ports linguarurn orientalium."
- - Qlrife a noueZfeature ir the addition oj a series of rndl-ckose7z ~ , & h
sc~dntcesfm fransCafwn into Arabic, which -&l be weZconze to lna'ia~z Civil S t r z f i c ~
--
candia'afes at least as a stepping-stone to Arabic composition on a larger scak.
The general outlines of the grammar Lave &tenpresemed, but the h f : d of a
judiciaLF ?-&er is vzkUe a~mosfon every pafe --
room has been ~ a d for e
a short chapter on syntax, which gives,in the narrow space of 22 pages
a char and infcZlt~Zenccoant of Arabic tczses, fke pmw7znrrnt of ver6 n7zd a n ,
and simpk and conlpound scntmces.
n i s will no doubt be highly appreciated by the student, and assist him
in mastering the contents of such standard grammars as Wright's, Caspari's
or De Sacy7s. Athenaeum March 19. 56.
-- - - -- -- p-----p- -- -- P

Williams t Norgate, 14, Henrietta Str., Cov. Garden, London; and 20, South
Frederick Str., Edinburgh.-B. Westermann & Co., Srz,Broadway, New York.
 P ORTA LIKGUARUII ORIENTALIUM
ELEMENTA LINGUARUN: Hebraicae, Phoeniciae,
Biblico-dramaicae, Samaritanae, Targumicae, Tal-
m u d i c a e , S-jriacae, A r a b i c a e , A e t h i o p i c a e , A s s y r i a c a e
Aegyptiacae, Copticae, Armeniacae, Persicae, Turcicae,
a l i a r u m studiis acadenscis acoommoda-ierunt
J. H. Petermann, H. L. Strack, E. Kestle, d. Socin, F. Pralorius,
Ad.31crx,dug. Miiller, Frdr. Delitzsch, C.Salemann,V. Shukovski,
Th. Niildelie, G. Sfeiudorff, G. Jacob, G. Dalman, alii.
'Die Porta linguarum orientalium, begomen von Prof. Dr. J. H.
P e f m a n a , seit 1b84 von Prof. D. E. L. St~ac7cin Berlin unter
Mitwirkung der hervorragendsten Fachmanner fortgesetzt, bezw. neu-
heransgegeben, soll als zweckmSssigstes
= Hiilfsmittei f i r das Studium der orientalischen Sprachen =
zunachst die e r s t e E i n f u h r u n g in dasselbe verrnitteln, und zwar
unter gleichzeitiger Riicksichtnahme auf den Gebrauch bei a k a d e-
n ~ i s c h e nV o r l e s u n g e n sowie fir das S e l b s t s t u d i u m .
Die Grammatiken bieten den besonderen Vorzug, &ass sie dem
An flln g e r alles zur Kenntsis der einzelnen Sprache Erforderliche
i n E i n e m Buche bieten, narnlich:
I. Eine kurze, aber vollst%ndigeG r a m m a t i k , in welcher, soweit
thunlich , fiir die verschiedenen Sprachen ein ..gleicher Lehrgang be-
folgt und, hei den semitischen Sprachen, auf TJbereinstimmung und
Abweichung hingewiesen wird. Seit dem Jahre 1885 enthalt jeder
neu erscheinende Band auch einen Abriss der S y n t a x .
2. Eine C h r e s t o m a t hie. Zur Sprachvergleichung und urn eine
sonst notige versio interlinealis zu vermeiden, sind in.-sieben Teilen
,die vier ersten Kapitel der Genesis nach den alten Ubersetzungen
an den Anfang gestellt. - In einigeq- Teilen werden Leseubungen
und aus einzelnen Formen bestehende Ubungsstiicke der eigentlichen
Chrestomathie vorangeschickt.
3. Ein W o r t e r b u c h , welches die in der Grammatik und im
Ebungsbuche vo~kommendenWiirter e r a r t .
4. Eine L i t t e r a t n r , welche, sorgfa;ltig zusammengestellt , An-
regung zu tiefer eindringender Arbeit gibt.
WO das Bediirhh vorliegt, bringt die P o r t a auoh f ii r s i c h
a b g e s c h l o s s e n e Chrestomathieen.
Bis jetzt weist die P o r t a

---
-
++folgende 22 B k d e anf: ++ (siehe umstellend)

Nea 1890: Noeldeke U. Muelier, Delectus veterum

Carrninum Arabicorum. M. 7.-.
Strack, hebrssche Grammatik 3. Auflage. M, 3.60.
 31. 7 . - . . ~...
Arrbische C i r a m n t a t i k , mrr r+.n-
dismen, Lit:eratx, Ckes:omn:hie ::
i;;;;ssrv..l.S~n?:. lVo!.lV!. 2:veit
.-- 3 - ~

~ f a l t i s i h e~ i b ~ - ( ' l ~ i ~ < t ~ ~ u ~ i ~ h i ~
hcra::srezchen c. r:i: c : . er. (;l( s:.r
sersel;&- s o n i ~ . 7 > b 7 ? ~ c o > _ (VO:.
-1x21.

I
- 1888. 31.
-.- . -- . P - 2-. 2 : . - .-- - -- Assyria11 G r a n t m a r :rirh Pars-
Assyrisehe Gramnintik mit Para- digrns, Chrestomnthy , Glcszary and
digmen, UeLungsst~cken, Gloisnr u. Lircrnture tr Fritar. Delif;scir.
Liitrra:ur son Frjcdr. DeL?z;c;:.
(Vol. Ss). -1583. . - .-
M. 12.-.- - -. -
~ethiopiiche$rammatik, ;nit pa- Grammatica
radigmen, Lirterztur, Ch:es:ornalhie
ei.,
aetliiopiea cUi
Litter ,.a. ,r,:aml:::; 1
und Gicssar von Fr.mr P ~ i i i o ~ ? r s .
IVol. YIIb). ..1886. .-.
31. 6.-.
. .---~ --
Grammatica ehaldaica. iitt.zratura. Grammatiea armeniaea, ~ i t t e r a -
sura. Chrestona:hia cum Glossario
edidit 7. if. I ' E ~ Z Y I I ~r Vol. I Ii.Z 1
~ ~ IV1 .
I
Chrestomathia targnmiea edidit
adnots:. critica. et glossario ~ilstruxit
.U. J1tr.r. [Sol. VIII). 1888. 11. :.v,. 1
Hebrew G l ' a m m a r x v i t h ~ e a d . book,
Exercises, Literat. and Vocab. by 1
I?. L. Sfrarb, s e c o n d enl.
(Sol. I bt. 1389. --hl. +.jo. - - -- " I

lI
nepC~,&Ct:aar p X t l ~ a ~ l l r ; Coeraen.nfi
a.
li. 3d.xena31.b n B. ~ ~ I . K O C C R 1890
~ ~ .
--Prets geb.--
11.-4.-.
--
Syriac Grammar with B~bliography.
Cl~restomathy and Glossary by
Eb. ,2'prtZe, (Vol. V b). 1689. hI.
--
8.7.
~ i l l r b n e hder Nenhebriischen
1 Sprache U. Lttreratur von H. L. S f ~ a c k
U. C. Sicgfri'Pd. (Erganzungsband).
1834. h1. 3.-.

Die E r w e i t e r u n ~der S a m m l u n ~und die Gewinnuwneuer

hervorragender hlyrarbeiter sinduGegeustand unausgesetzter
Bemuhungen des Herausgebers - und der unterzeichneten Verlagsbuch-
handlung.
Das wichtige Unternehmen sei hierrnit Men, welche fiir Sprachen
und Litteratur des Orients ein Interesse haben, angelegentlichst
empfohlen.
B e r l i n , September 1890. H. Reuther's Verlagsbuchhandiung.
-- ..
- Zu bexiehen durch jede Bnchhandl~mg. =
 T i l l i a m s and Norgate's School Books and Maps.
Williams (T. S.) Modern German and English Conversations
s s d Elementary Phrases, the German revised and
corrected by 9.Kokemueller. 21st enlarged and
improved Edition. 1'2mo. cloth Ss
Williams (T. S.) and C. Cruse. German and English
Commercial Correspondence. A Collection of Xodera
Mercantile Letters in German and English, with their
Translation on opposite pages. 2nd Edition. 12mo.
cloth 4s dd
Hickie (W. J.) Easy German Reading-Book. With Outline
of GRAXMAR, etc. 8vo. cloth 1s 6 ~ 2
Apel (H.) German Prose Stories for Beginners (including
Lessing's Prose Fables), with an interlinear Trans-
lation in the natural order of Construction. 2nd
Edition. l h o . cloth 2s 6 d

Grimm's Hausmarchen, by TV. J. Hickie 2s

Schiller's Lied von der Glocke (The Song of the Bell), and
other Poems and Ballads, by M. Forster 2s
- Minor Poems. B y Arthur P. Vernon
Maria Stuart, by AIoritz Forster
Goethe's Hermann und Dorothea, by M. Forster
2~
2s 6d
2s 6d
Iphigenie auf Tauris. With Notes by H. Attwell.
# 2s
-- Egmont. By H. Ape1 2s 6d
Lessing's Minna von Barnhelm, by Schmidt 2s 6d
- Emilia Galotti. By G. Hein 2s
Chamisso's Peter Schlernihl, by 11.Fijrster 2s
Andersen (H. C.) Bilderbuch ohne Bilder, by Beck 2s
Nierits. Die Waise, a Tale, by Otte 2s
H a u F s BIIaerchen. A Selection, by A. Hoare 3s 6d

Fouque's Undine, Sintram, Aslituga's Ritter, die beiden

Hanptlente. 4 vols. in l. 8vo. cloth 5s
Undine. 1s 6 d ; cloth, 2s. Aslauga. Is 6 d ; cloth, 2s
Sintram. 2s 6cZ ; cloth, 3s. Hanptleute. Is 6 d ; cloth, 2s
rF;1
 Wzilzan2s nltd S orgate s hcl~oolBooks a?& Z a p s .
1
ailtin, Grrrli, rtr,
T

Casar de Bello Gallico. Lib. I. Edited xith Introduction,

Sotes and Afaps, by A L E \ ~ X D Jr. ~ P .BLLI;.,
N.A. BalI.
Coll., Oxon. Cro\.zn G-io. cloth '3s Gcl
Enripides' Medea. The Greek Test, vitk Introdnction and
Explanatory Sotes for Schools, by J. H. Hogan. 8vo.
~10th 3s C;d
Ion. Greek Test, xith Sotes for Beginners,
Introduction and Ques~ionsfor Examination, by the
Re-r. Charles Badham, D.E. 2nd Edition. 8ro. 3s tjd
Flatonis Philebus. Kith Introduction and Kotes by Dr.
C. Badham. 2nd Edition, considerably an-vmented.
BVO. cloth 4s
Dr. D. Zompolides. A Course of Modern Greek, or the
Greek Lang~fige of the Present Day. I. The
E l e m e n t a ~Nethnrl.
~ C ' r r , ~ nRro. 5s
-- -- -- .-

ICiepert New Atlas Antiquns. Xaps of the Ancient World,

for Schools and Colleges. 6 t h Edition. V i t h a com-
plete Geographical Index. Folio, boards 'is 6d
Xampen. 15 Maps to illustrate Cssar's De Bello Gallico.
15 colonred >-laps. 4to. cloth 3s tjd
- - .-- -

spxltir;~,
Harvey (W. F.) Practical Spanish Manual. Grammar,
Exercises, Reading Le

.
)

Edition. Crown 8vo. cloth (Key, 1s) 4 s 6d

I&aoeonti Istorici e Novelle Yorali. Edited, for the use
of Italian Students, by G. Christison. 12th Edition.
18rno. cloth 1s 6d
Rossetti. Exercises for securing Idiomatic Italian, by
means of Literal Translations from the English by
M s s b F. Rossetti. l2mo. cloth 3s 6 d
- Aneddoti Italiani. One Hundred Italian Anec-
dotes, selected from L L I ICompapo del Passeggio."
161